SP 4430 ServiceManual SP3 C37B 029 Rev.F

ＳＰＯＴＣＨＥＭＴＭ
ＳＰ-４４３０
SERVICE MANUAL
Date of issue March.2001
Drawing No. SP-3-C37B-029
Rev. F (2016/07/20)
SP-4430 Service manual
INTRODUCTION
The SPOTCHEMTM EZ（SP-4430） analyzer is manufactured under a strict quality control,
however, because it is a precision instrument, if one part is deteriorated, satisfactory result
may not be obtained. Furthermore, because it is an analyzer using high technology, any
operational trouble also affects measurement result significantly. In case a trouble is
occurred due to such a reason, refer to this service manual and operating manual for an
appropriate remedy.
CAUTION
This service manual is made for specially trained service representative only. This
may be used as a reference material for other persons, however, ARKRAY
Corporation bears no liability for any accidents or no warranty of the product if
undesignated person performs the service described on this manual.
Rev.F
Contents
Introduction
1. Outline of the Analyzer

1. Features ··················································································· 1-2
2. Product Package ········································································ 1-2
3. Specifications ············································································ 1-3
4. Functions ·················································································· 1-5
5. Parameters ··············································································· 1-6
6. Measurement Operation ······························································· 1-6
7. Principle ··················································································· 1-7
8. Coefficients ··············································································· 1-8
2. Composition
1. Diagram ··················································································· 2-2
2. Assembling flow chart ································································· 2-3
3. Developed Diagram ···································································· 2-4
3. Service mode
1. Menu list of the service mode ························································ 3-3
2. Basic Operation in the service mode··············································· 3-6
3. Sub Menu ················································································· 3-11
4. Adjustments ·············································································· 3-20
5. Package ··················································································· 3-42
6. Trouble Log··············································································· 3-42
7. Memory ···················································································· 3-43
8. Version Information ····································································· 3-45
9. Product Information ···································································· 3-45
4. Circuit Diagram
5. Standard Checks
1. Check Items ·············································································· 5-2
2. Instructions and Standards ··························································· 5-3
6. Adjustments
1. Adjustment Items and Tools·························································· 6-2
2. Adjustments ·············································································· 6-3
Appendix
Appendix 1 Printing Specifications
Appendix 2 Communication Specifications
Appendix 3 Error / Trouble Specifications
Rev.F
Revision history
No. Date of revision Item Description
D 27 September, ALL Revisions made by page units for
2011 unification with Revision D
Chapter2 Composition Deletion of code from
Model/Specification
Chapter2 Addition in accordance with specification
3. Developed Diagram change
(5) Chassis Assembly
(11) Light Source Unit Assembly
(12) Nozzle Drive Assembly
(13) Nozzle Up-Down Drive Assembly
(14) Nozzle Left-Right Drive Assembly
Chapter2 Addition and revision of product codes
3. Developed Diagram
Chapter3 Service mode Correction
Chapter4 Circuit diagram Correction
Chapter6 2.Adjustments Addition of adjustment method
1)-1-2．Nozzle Up-Down Position
Adjustment
1)-3-2．Nozzle Up-Down Position
Adjustment
Chapter6 2.Adjustments Change to a jig-less adjustment method
4)Centrifuge Adjustments
Chapter6 2.Adjustments Addition in accordance with specification
(7)Nozzle Piping Adjustment change
(8)Assembly position of Nozzle drive unit
Appendix1 Printing specifications Correction
Appendix2 Communication specifications
Appendix3 Error/Trouble specifications
E 27 March, Chapter2 2.Assembly Flowchart Delete: Paint spec of Cover
2016 Chapter2 3(1)Analyzer assembly Addition: Note of Item No.5
Chapter2 3(3)Magnetic Card Unit Addition in accordance with specification
change
Chapter2 3(4)Under body assembly Correction:Code of from 97029 to 97209
Chapter2 3(6)Board Assembly Addition: Code of
ProgramPCB(SP-4430)
Chapter2 3(10)Photometry System Addition: 102345
Assembly
Chapter2 3(11)Light source unit assembly Addition in accordance with specification
change
Chapter3 3.2(3)Communication Delete: Boudrate
Chapter3 3.2(8)Others Correction: The item of Display in a table
Addition: Note
Chapter3 4.2(3)Calibrate & (4)Confirm Addition: Preparation
Chapter4 Schematics Addition: Code of B680-152
Chapter6 1(1) Adjustment Items and Tools Addition
Chapter6 2(1)-6-2.Nozzle Up-Down Pulse Correction:Step2
Adjustment（Nozzle Down-Most Position） Correction: Standard value
From 3.7±0.1mm to 3.7±0.3mm
Chapter6 2(3)-1.Preparations Correction: step7
Chapter6 2(9) Optical system calibration Addition
Correction
Appendix1 Printing specifications Correction
Appendix2 Communication specifications
Appendix3 Error/Trouble specifications
20 July, 2016 Chapter6 2 (3) Optical System Adjustments Correction
F
Rev.F
SP-4430 SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer
1. Features
Refer to Operating Manual.
2. Specifications
3. Measurement Principle
Rev.F
Chapter 2 Composition
1. Diagram ................................................................................................................................................... 2
2. Assembly Flowchart ............................................................................................................................... 3
3. Developed Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 4
(1) Analyzer Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 4
(2) Upper Body Assembly....................................................................................................................... 6
(3) Magnetic Card Unit ............................................................................................................................ 7
(4) Under Body Assembly....................................................................................................................... 8
(5) Chassis Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 11
(5-1) Pre-specification change: Lots up to S/N.41105099 ................................................................... 11
(5-2) Post-specification change: Lots from S/N.41106001 .................................................................. 13
(6) Board Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 16
(7) Centrifuge Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 18
(8) Measurement Part Assembly .......................................................................................................... 21
(9) Table Transfer Assembly ................................................................................................................ 24
(10) Photometry System Assembly ..................................................................................................... 26
(11) Light Source Unit Assembly ......................................................................................................... 28
(12) Nozzle Drive Assembly ................................................................................................................. 30
(12-1) Pre-specification change: Lots up to S/N.41105099 ................................................................. 30
(12-2) Post-specification change: Lots from S/N.41106001 ................................................................ 32
(13) Nozzle Up-Down Drive Assembly ................................................................................................. 34
(14) Nozzle Left-Right Drive Assembly................................................................................................ 36
(15) Sampling Pump Assembly............................................................................................................ 38
2-1 Rev.F
Chapter 2 Composition SP-4430 SERVICE MANUAL
1. Diagram
EXTERNAL INPUT
OUTPUT AC230V
BARCODE POWER
READER CIRCUIT
ADAPTER
CONTRAST
VOLUME
OPTICAL UNIT
PRINTER
LCD COMPUTING NOZZLE UNIT

&
CONTROL
UNIT
OPERATION
REAGENT
STRIP
TABLE
MAGNETIC
CARD READER
MULTI RACK
2-2 Rev.F
2. Assembly Flowchart
Analyzer Assembly
Upper Body Assembly
Under Body Assembly
Front Inner Panel Assembly
Paper Cover Assembly
Maintenance Cover Detection Assembly
Chassis Assembly
Fan Motor Assembly
PI Stay Assembly
Board Assembly
Main PWA Assembly
PMC PWA
Power PWA
Centrifuge Assembly
Measurement Part Assembly
Table Transfer Assembly
Photometry System Assembly
Light Source Unit Assembly
Head Amp A/D PWA
Nozzle Drive Assembly
Nozzle Up-Down Drive Assembly *Lots up to 1012050
Nozzle Left-Right Drive Assembly
Sampling Pump Assembly
Nozzle Relay PWA
Nozzle Tubes Assembly
Pressure Tube Assembly
2-3 Rev.F
3. Developed Diagram
(1) Analyzer Assembly
Note: View without Tubes, Wiring or Thermal Printer Paper
Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

－ 1 －
[Upper Cover]
Installation Screw
U Mark x2
[Upper Cover]
Installation Screw x2 [ROM Access Cover]
Installation Screw x1
2-4 Rev.F
Item No. Qty Parts Model No. Specification Item Code Cont
1 1 Upper Body Assembly
2 1 Under Body Assembly
3 1 Maintenance Cover (Side) 97180 1
4 1 Maintenance Cover (Top) 97181 1
5 1 Optical Window Maintenance Cover except China spec. 96770 1
6 1 ROM Access Cover
7 1 Hole Plug
8 2 Screw with hexagonal hole M3×8(SUS)
9 2 Screw with hexagonal hole 3-Semus M3×8(SUS)
10 1 Flat-head Small Screw 3-Semus M3×6(SUS)
2-5 Rev.F
(2) Upper Body Assembly

Note: View without Wiring.

1 2 －
2-6 Rev.F
1 1 Upper Cover 97177 1
2 1 Thermal Line Printer 95248 1
3 1 Panel PCB 95559 1
4 1 Display Assembly 95558 1
5 1 Membrane Switch (EZ) 95863 1
6 1 Paper Guide Roller Assembly
1 Printer Cover 97182 1
7
1 Printer Cover (paint spec.)
8 1 Power Monitor LED Wire 95864 1
9 4 P TIGHT M3×8
10 1 Magnetic Card Reader Unit 95560 1
(3) Magnetic Card Reader Unit
1
2
●Before S/N.41505021 and before S/N.51505001

1 1 Magnetic Card Reader 92835 1
2 1 Flat-head Small Screw 3-Semus M2×10
Note: Production of these items have been discontinued.
●From S/N.41505021 onwards and from S/N.51505001 onwards

1 1 Magnetic Card Reader 102004 1
2 2 Flat-head Small Screw 3-Semus M2x10
Note: Magnetic card readers inside the new and old assemblies above are not compatible and also only
the dedicated attachment plates (metal plate) for each assembly can be used.
An old type magnetic card reader cannot be replaced with a new type of Magnetic card reader as an
individual part.
Magnetic card reader assembly (95560) can be replaced regardless of the new/old type.
2-7 Rev.F
(4) Under Body Assembly

Note: View without Tubes or Wiring.
[Front Inner Panel Assembly]

Installation Screw x 2
2-8 Rev.F
[Under Cover] Installation Screw

C Mark x5
[Front Inner Panel Assembly]

Installation Screw ×1
2-9 Rev.F
1 1 Chassis Assembly
2 1 Under Cover 97178 1
3 1 Opening/Closing Spring (Right)
4 1 Opening/Closing Spring (Left)
5 1 Front Cover 97179 1
6 1 Front Inner cover 97208 1
7 1 Front Cover Detecting Wiring 95561 1
8 1 Paper Cover Assembly 97183 1
9 1 Maintenance Cover Detecting Wiring 95562 1
11 6 Flat-head Screw 3-Semus M3×8(SUS)
12 2 P TIGHT M3×8
13 1 Paper inner cover 97209 1
14 1 WP cover 97224 1
2-10 Rev.F
(5) Chassis Assembly

(5-1) Pre-specification change: Lots up to S/N.41105099 (Old ARKRAY symbol mark)

1-3 4 Centrifuge adjustment 6-22
2-11 Rev.F
1 1 Chassis
2 1 Measurement Parts Assembly
3 1 Centrifuge Unit 95773 1
4 1 Nozzle Drive Assembly
5 1 Board Assembly
6 1 L Angle
7 1 L Angle 2
8 1 PI Stay Assembly 95564 1
9 1 Fan Motor Assembly 95563 1
10 2 Flat-head Small Screw M3×4(SUS)
14 1 Spring Washer M3 (SUS)
15 5 Washer M3 (SUS)
2-12 Rev.F
(5-2) Post-specification change: Lots from S/N.41106001 (New ARKRAY symbol mark)
11
12
12
11
12
10
13 ×3
16 ×4
12 ×2
13
11 11
2-13 Rev.F
2-14 Rev.F
1 1 Chassis
2 1 Measurement Parts Assembly
3 1 Board Assembly
4 1 Fan motor Assembly 95563 1
5 1 Centrifuge Unit 95773 1
6 1 Nozzle Drive Assembly
7 1 Bracket base
8 1 Nozzle chassis bracket
9 1 PI stay Assembly 95564 1
Small Screw with hexagonal hole
13 5 M3×6(SUS)
3-Semus
15 4 Spring Washer M3 (SUS)
16 6 Washer M3 (SUS)
2-15 Rev.F
(6) Board Assembly


1-3-4 5 －
2-16 Rev.F
1 1 PCB Guide Assembly
2 1 PMC PCB 95567 1
3 1 Main PCB 95565 1
4 1 Program PCB(SP-4430) 95566 1
5 1 Power Supply PCB 95568 1
6 1 Insulating Sheet
8 2 Stainless Steel Spacer
10 2 Hexagon Nut M3(SUS)
11 1 Memory PCB(Data ROM) 96428 1
2-17 Rev.F
(7) Centrifuge Assembly


1-3-4 6 Centrifuge adjustment 6-22
PI Actuator
2-18 Rev.F
2-19 Rev.F
1 1 Centrifuge Chassis
2 1 Centrifuge Under
3 1 Centrifuge Rotor Motor Wiring With Container Holder 95777 1
4 1 Centrifuge F/B Motor Wiring With Pinion Gear 95574 1
5 1 Centrifuge Rotor Detecting Wiring 95775 1
6 1 Tube Detecting Wiring With PI Actuator 95776 1
7 1 Tip holder
8 1 Centrifuge Upper
9 1 Centrifuge PCB 95774 1
10 1 Centrifuge Connecting PCB 95778 1
11 1 Board Bracket
13 3 P TIGHT M3×8
14 1 Centrifuge FPC 95599 1
16 1 Motor holder 97207 1
2-20 Rev.F
(8) Measurement Part Assembly


1-3-4 7 －
2-21 Rev.F
2-22 Rev.F
1 1 Table Transfer Assembly
2 1 Optical Unit 95578 1
3 1 HA Chassis
4 1 Head-AMP A/D PCB 95586 1
5 1 Light Source Unit Assembly
6 2 Ultra Spring
7 1 Optical block Fiber Stopper
8 1 Shield Cover
9 2 E-type Snap-ring
13 1 Rosette Washer
14 1 Flat Small Screw M3×6(SUS)
2-23 Rev.F
(9) Table Transfer Assembly


1-3-4-7 8 －
2-24 Rev.F
1 1 Table Unit 95576 1
2 1 Table Chassis Assembly
3 1 Left Table Guide Assembly
4 1 Right Table Guide Assembly
5 1 Table Motor Wiring 95577 1
6 1 Rubber Pad 95866 5
7 1 Front Stopper
8 1 PI PCB 95324 1
2-25 Rev.F
(10) Photometry System Assembly


1-3-4-7 9 －
For Thermistor sensor
2-26 Rev.F
Heater
⑤
⑦ Glass Plate
1 1 Optical Base
2 1 Optical Block Unit
3 1 Heater/Glass Set
4 1 Photo Detector 1 Wiring 95580 1
5 1 Photo Detector 2 Wiring 95581 1
6 1 REF Block
7 1 Bar-Code FPC 95582 1
8 1 BC Cover
10 4 Flat Small Screw M2.6×6(SUS)
11 4 Flat Small Screw M2×4(SUS)
12 1 BC reinforcement plate
13 1 Joiner 102345 1
Upper Right
Side Side
2-27 Rev.F
(11) Light Source Unit Assembly


1-3-4 10 －
14
15
2-28 Rev.F
1 1 Light Source Chassis
2 1 Under Fiber Case
3 1 Light Source Unit 95883 1
*95882
4 1 LED Wiring 1
(98876/102713)
*95881
5 1 LED PCB 1
(98875/102714)
6 1 Optical Fiber 95587 1
7 1 Light Source Fiber Stopper
8 1 Upper Fiber Case
13 3 Truss small screw M3×6(SUS)
*For devices which contain this specification change (from S/N: 41106001 onwards), please use items 14
and 15 or 16 and 17 on the table below when replacing the optical LED assembly and optical LED PCB.
14 1 LED Wiring (for M New LED) 98876 1
15 1 Light source LED PWA (for M New LED) 98875 1
16 1 LED Wiring (for M 2) 102713 1

17 1 Light source LED PWA (for M 2) 102714 1
*For the pre-change device, Light Source LED PWA (code:98875) and LED Wiring (code:98876) or
Light Source LED PWA (code:102713) and LED Wiring (code:102714) must be replaced together.
For the new device, Light Source LED PWA (code:95881) and LED Wiring (code:95882) must be
replaced together.
Note:
* The manufacture of the Light Source LED PWA (code:95881) and LED Wiring (code:95882) has been
discontinued.
2-29 Rev.F
(12) Nozzle Drive Assembly


1-3-4 11 Nozzle Piping Adjustment 6-33
2-30 Rev.F
* See Chapter 6 [Nozzle Piping Adjustment] when replacing the Nozzle piping
assembly (5) and the pressure test piping assembly (6).
1 1 Nozzle U/D Unit 95588 1
2 1 Nozzle Left-Right Drive Assembly
3 1 Nozzle Connecting PWA 95594 1
4 1 Sampling Pump Assembly
5 1 Nozzle Piping Assembly 95595 1
6 1 Pressure Sensor Piping Assembly 95596 1
7 1 Shaft
8 1 Shaft Stopper
9 1 Cermet Detecting
13 3 O ring P3(Silicon)
2-31 Rev.F
1-3-4 11 Nozzle Piping Adjustment 6-33
10 4
12 3 2 9
8 11
5
11
13 1
6
14 15 16
2-32 Rev.F
* See Chapter 6 [Nozzle Piping Adjustment] when replacing the Nozzle piping
assembly (5) and the pressure test piping assembly (6).
1 1 Nozzle Left-Right Drive Assembly Refer below
2 1 Nozzle Connecting PWA 95594 1
3 1 Sampling Pump Assembly
4 1 Nozzle Piping Assembly 95595 1
5 1 Pressure detector 95596 1
6 1 Nozzle R/L FPC (M) 98878 1
7 1 Timing belt Nozzle R/L (M) 98879 1
8 1 PI wiring 95592 1
9 1 Nozzle R/L Motor wiring (M) * With pulley 98887 1
10 3 Flat-head Small Screw M3x6
11 4 Flat-head Screw 3-Semus M3x6
13 4 Screw with hexagonal hole 3-Semus M3x6
14 2 Screw with hexagonal hole M3x5
15 2 Spring washer M3
16 2 Small washer M3
*Devices prior to the specification change contain a different pulley and so are not compatible.
●About Nozzle L/R Drive Unit parts

When the Nozzle L/R Drive Unit needs to be replaced, please use the following assembly. A jig is typically
needed during construction of the nozzle drive unit but the assembly below does not require a jig.
Consists of the following units:
* Nozzle Left-Right Drive
Assembly
1 1 Nozzle Drive Unit (M) 98880 1
* Shaft x2
* Nozzle Chassis
(Front, Left/Right)
2-33 Rev.F
(13) Nozzle Up-Down Drive Assembly


1-3-4-11 12 －
2-34 Rev.F
1 1 Housing
2 1 Nozzle Wiring 95590 1
3 1 Motor 92553 1
4 1 Arm
5 1 UD spring
6 1 Nozzle Holder
7 1 Nozzle pipe Assembly 95880 1
8 1 O-Ring for aircraft
9 1 Nozzle (EZ) 10699 2
10 1 Compression Coil Spring
11 1 Snap pin
12 1 Screw with Hexagon Hole M3×5(Flat)
15 1 Spacer
1 1 Nozzle Left-Right Drive Assembly
2 1 Motor 92553 1
3 1 Arm
4 1 Nozzle Wiring 95590 1
7 1 Screw with hexagonal hole M3x5
2-35 Rev.F
(14) Nozzle Left-Right Drive Assembly


1-3-4-11 13 －
2-36 Rev.F
1 1 Nozzle Chassis
2 1 Nozzle Motor (L/R) (*1) With pulley 95591 1
3 1 PI Wiring(Nozzle L/R) 95592 1
4 1 Idler Holder
5 1 Idler
6 1 Tension Spring
7 1 Tip eject plate
3 Screw with hexagonal hole M3×5(SUS)
8 3 Spring washer M3(SUS)
3 Small washer M3(SUS)
2 Flat-head Small Screw 3-Semus M3×5(SUS)
10
2 Washer TM-147 No.1
11 1 Belt (Nozzle drive) 95523 1
95600 (*2)
12 1 FPC (Nozzle left-right movement) 1
(98877)
*1 The pulley in the new (post specification change) Nozzle L/R Motor Wiring is different and not
compatible.
*2 Production of the FPC assembly has been discontinued so once we no longer have Item (product code)
95600 in stock, we will switch to Item (product code) 98877.
The new (post specification change) Nozzle Left-Right Drive Assembly that is compatible with the old
(pre-specification change) device contains the (12-2) Nozzle driving unit. For details about the parts within
the new assembly, please refer to the composition diagram for (12-2) Nozzle Drive Unit.
2-37 Rev.F
(15) Sampling Pump Assembly


1-3-4 14 Sampling Pump adjustment 6-27
1 1 Pump Base
2 1 Plunger Pump Assembly 95593 1
3 1 Slider 95485 1
4 1 PI PCB 95324 1
5 1 Motor(for Sampling Unit) 95400 1
2 Flat-head Small Screw 3-Semus M3×6(SUS)
7 2 Spring washer M3(SUS)
2 Small washer M3(SUS)
9 1 Screw with Hexagon Hole M3×6(WP)
2-38 Rev.F
Chapter 3 Service Mode（Version 2.00 or later）

1. Menu of the service mode ................................................................................................................................3
1.1. Menu of the service mode (1/2 page) ........................................................................................................3
1.2(1). Menu of the service mode (2/2 page) ...................................................................................................4
1.2(2). Menu of the service mode (2/2 page) (Version 2.04 or later) .............................................................5
2. Basic Operation in the Service Mode ................................................................................................................6
2.1. To Access the Service Mode at Analyzer Startup ...................................................................................6
2.2. To Access the Service Mode from the Main Menu ..................................................................................7
2.3. Returning to the User Mode from the Service Mode ...............................................................................7
2.4. Skipping Temperature Preparations at Power On ...................................................................................7
2.5. Basic Operation for Menus ........................................................................................................................8
2.6. How to Select Items ....................................................................................................................................8
2.7. How to Enter Numerical Values .................................................................................................................9
2.8. How to Enter Text .......................................................................................................................................9
2.9. How to Set the Date and Time .................................................................................................................10
2.10. Confirmation Prior to Processing .........................................................................................................10
3. Sub Menu ..........................................................................................................................................................11
3.1. Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................11
(1) Strip ...........................................................................................................................................................11
3.2. Setup ..........................................................................................................................................................12
(1) Print ...........................................................................................................................................................12
(2) Printer........................................................................................................................................................12
(3) Communication .........................................................................................................................................12
(4) BCR ...........................................................................................................................................................13
(5) Date ...........................................................................................................................................................13
(6) Language ..................................................................................................................................................14
(7) Tip .............................................................................................................................................................14
(8)Others ........................................................................................................................................................14
(9) Initialize .....................................................................................................................................................16
3.3. Unit .............................................................................................................................................................16
(1) Print ...........................................................................................................................................................16
(2) Input ..........................................................................................................................................................16
(3) Initialize .....................................................................................................................................................18
(4) SI ...............................................................................................................................................................18
3.4. Range .........................................................................................................................................................19
(1) Print ...........................................................................................................................................................19
(2) Input ..........................................................................................................................................................19
(3) Initialize .....................................................................................................................................................19
4. Adjustments .....................................................................................................................................................20
4.1. Hardware Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................20
(1) Print ...........................................................................................................................................................20
(2) Origin .........................................................................................................................................................20
(3) Test ...........................................................................................................................................................21
(4) Sensor .......................................................................................................................................................24
(5) Adjust ........................................................................................................................................................26
(6) Input ..........................................................................................................................................................28
(7) Unit ............................................................................................................................................................29
(8) SUB A/D ....................................................................................................................................................29
(9) Initialize .....................................................................................................................................................30
(10) Counter ...................................................................................................................................................30
4.2. Optical System Adjustments and Checks ..............................................................................................31
(1) Print ...........................................................................................................................................................31
(2) Test ...........................................................................................................................................................31
(3-1) Calibrate.................................................................................................................................................32
(3-2) Calibrate2...............................................................................................................................................33
(4) Confirm......................................................................................................................................................34
(5) Check ........................................................................................................................................................35
(6) Initialize .....................................................................................................................................................37
4.3. LCD Test ....................................................................................................................................................38
4.4. Buzzer Test ................................................................................................................................................38
3-1 Rev.F
4.5. Printer Test ................................................................................................................................................38

4.6. Hand-held Bar Code Reader Test ............................................................................................................38
4.7. Optical System A/D Head Amp Test .......................................................................................................39
4.8. Centrifuge Adjustment .............................................................................................................................40
(1) Centrifuge rotation speed adjustment .......................................................................................................40
(2) Centrifuge rotation positioning pitch adjustment .......................................................................................40
(3) Centrifuge forward/backward speed adjustment ......................................................................................41
4.9. Temperature Adjustment and Check ......................................................................................................41
5. Package ............................................................................................................................................................42
5.1. Preparations ..............................................................................................................................................42
6. Trouble Log ......................................................................................................................................................42
6.1. Printing the Trouble Log ..........................................................................................................................42
6.2. Clearing the Trouble Log .........................................................................................................................42
7. Memory .............................................................................................................................................................43
7.1. Initializing Product Information ...............................................................................................................43
7.2. Initializing Optical System Information ..................................................................................................43
7.3. Initializing Hardware Information ............................................................................................................43
7.4. Initializing Option Settings.......................................................................................................................44
7.5. Clearing Measurement Results ...............................................................................................................44
7.6. Clearing the Trouble Log .........................................................................................................................44
7.7. Clearing Parameters (Magnetic Card Data) ............................................................................................44
7.8. Performing All Memory Operations ........................................................................................................44
8. Upgrading the Centrifuge ...............................................................................................................................45
8.1. Upgrade procedure ...................................................................................................................................45
9. Product Information.........................................................................................................................................45
9.1. Input・Print ..............................................................................................................................................45
3-2 Rev.F
Chapter 3 Service Mode SP-4430 SERVICE MANUAL
1. Menu of the service mode
1.1. Menu of the service mode (1/2 page)
1.Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ Getting the Measurement Standby Screen
7.Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ Getting the Control Measurement
2.Ｓｕｂｍｅｎｕ 1.Ｒｅｓｕｌｔｓ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ 1.Ｌａｔｅｓｔ Reprinting Measurement Results(Latest)

2.ＡＬＬ Reprinting Measurement Results(All)
3.Ｓｅａｒｃｈ Reprinting Measurement Results(Search)
2.Ｓｅｎｄ 1.Ｌａｔｅｓｔ Retransmitting Measurement Results(Latest)
2.ＡＬＬ Retransmitting Measurement Results(All)
3.Ｓｅａｒｃｈ Retransmitting Measurement Results(Search)
3.Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ Deleting Measurement Results
2.ＰＡＲＡＭ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing User Parameters

2.Ｉｎｐｕｔ Setting User Parameters
3.Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ Initializing User Parameters
4.Ｔｙｐｅ Input of sample type
5.Ｃｏｐｙ Copy of the standard range setting
3.Ｍａｉｎｔｅｎａｎｃｅ Maintenance Menu

4.Ｍｏｄｅ 1.Ｓｕｒｖｅｙ Survey Mode Setup
2.Ｓｔｒｉｐ Reagent Strip Mode Setup (NOBAR and ND)
5.Ｃｌｏｃｋ Setting the Clock

6.Ｓｅｔｕｐ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Optional Parameters
2.Ｐｒｉｎｔｅｒ Setting Printer Options
3.Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ Setting Communication Options
4.ＢＣＲ Setting Bar Code Reader Options
5.Ｄａｔｅ Setting Date Options
6.Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ Setting Language Options
7.Ｔｉｐ Setting Tip Waste Case Message
8.Ｏｔｈｅｒｓ Setting CARE LAB and Linkage Printing
9.Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ Initializing Option Parameters
7.Ｕｎｉｔ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Service Parameters

2.Ｉｎｐｕｔ Setting Unit Parameter
3.Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ Initializing Unit Parameter
4.ＳＩ Batch Setting for Units
8.Ｒａｎｇｅ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Service Parameters

2.Ｉｎｐｕｔ Setting Measurement Range
3.Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ Initializing Measurement Range
3.Ｃａｌｉｂｒａｔｅ 1.ＣＡＲＤ Magnetic Card Calibration

2.Ｃａｌ． Live Calibration
3.Ｉｎｆｏｍａｔｉｏｎ Checking Calibration Information
※ : User Mode. The instructions are not on this service manual.

See the operating manual.
3-3 Rev.F
1.2(1). Menu of the service mode (2/2 page)

4.Ａｄｊｕｓｔ 1.Ｈａｒｄ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Machine Information
2.Ｏｒｉｇｉｎ Initializing All Mechanisms
3.Ｔｅｓｔ 1.Ｔｉｐ Picking-Up Test for Tips
2.Ｐｒｅｓｓ Air Leak Detection Test
3.Ｃｅｎｔｒｉｆｕｇｅ Centrifuge Test
4.Ｓａｍｐｌｅ Liquid Level Detection Test
5.Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅ Barcode Reading test
6.Ｓａｍｐｌｉｎｇ Sampling Test
7.Ｄｒｏｐ Drop Test
4.Ｓｅｎｓｏｒ Check Sensor Status
5.Ａｄｊｕｓｔ 1.Ｐｉｃｋｕｐ Nozzle Adjustment at Tip Pickup Position
2.Ｅｊｅｃｔ Nozzle Adjustment at Tip Removal Position
3.Ｐｒｅｓｓｕｒｅ Nozzle Adjustment at Air Leak Test Position
4.Ｄｒｏｐ－Ｔ Table Adjustment at Drop Position
5.Ｄｒｏｐ－９ Nozzle Adjustment at CH9 Drop Position
6.Ｄｒｏｐ－１ Nozzle Adjustment at CH1 Drop Position
7.ＣＮＴＲＦＧ Centrifuge F/B Stand-by Position Adjustment
8.Ｃｕｖｅｔｔｅ Nozzle Adjustment at Sampling Position
6.Ｉｎｐｕｔ Entering Machine Information
7.Ｕｎｉｔ Single Mechanism Test
8.ＳＵＢＡ／Ｄ 1.Ｐｒｅｓｓ Air Leak Detection Test with A/D printing
2.Ｓａｍｐｌｅ Liquid Level Detection Test with A/D printing
3.Ｓａｍｐｌｉｎｇ Sampling Test with A/D printing
4.Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅ Barcode Reading Test with A/D printing
9.Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ Initializing Machine Information
0.Ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒ Entering Total Operation Cycles
2.Ｏｐｔｉｃａｌ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Optical System Information
2.Ｔｅｓｔ Optical System Test
3.Ｃａｌｉｂｒａｔｅ Optical System Calibration
4.Ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ 1.Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ Checking Optical System Calibration
5.Ｃｈｅｃｋ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Optical System Contamination Level
2.Ｉｎｐｕｔ Setting Optical System Contamination Level
3.Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ Entering Optical System Contamination Level
6.Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ Initializing Optical System Information
3.ＬＣＤ LCD Test
4.Ｂｕｚｚｅｒ Buzzer Test
5.Ｐｒｉｎｔｅｒ Printer Test

6.ＢＣＲ Hand-held Bar Code Reader Test
7.Ａ／Ｄ Head Amp Test
8.ＣＮＴＲＦＧ 1.ＲＯＴ（１） Centrifuge Rotation Speed Adjustment
2.ＲＯＴ（２） Centrifuge Rotation Positioning Adjustment
3.Ｆ／Ｂ Centrifuge F/B Speed Adjustment
9.ＴＥＭＰ Temperature Adjustment and Check
5.Ｐａｃｋａｇｅ Packaging Preparations
6.Ｅｒｒｏｒ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing the Trouble Log
2.Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ Deleting the Trouble Log
7.Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ 1.Ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔ Initializing Product Information
2.Ｏｐｔｉｃａｌ Initializing Service Parameters
3.Ｈａｒｄ Initializing Machine Information
4.Ｓｅｔｕｐ Initializing Option Parameters
5.Ｒｅｓｕｌｔｓ Deleting Measurement Results
6.Ｅｒｒｏｒ Deleting the Trouble Log
7.ＰＡＲＡＭ Initializing Service Parameters
8.ＡＬＬ Deleting and Initializing All Information
8.Ｖｅｒｕｐ Upgrade the Centrifuge
9.Ｆａｃｔｏｒｙ 1.Ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔ Entering Product Information
3-4 Rev.F
1.2(2). Menu of the service mode (2/2 page) (Version 2.04 or later)
4.Ａｄｊｕｓｔ 1.Ｈａｒｄ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Machine Information
2.Ｏｒｉｇｉｎ Initializing All Mechanisms
3.Ｔｅｓｔ 1.Ｔｉｐ Picking-Up Test for Tips
2.Ｐｒｅｓｓ Air Leak Detection Test
3.Ｃｅｎｔｒｉｆｕｇｅ Centrifuge Test
4.Ｓａｍｐｌｅ Liquid Level Detection Test
5.Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅ Barcode Reading test
6.Ｓａｍｐｌｉｎｇ Sampling Test
7.Ｄｒｏｐ Drop Test
4.Ｓｅｎｓｏｒ Check Sensor Status
5.Ａｄｊｕｓｔ 1.Ｐｉｃｋｕｐ Nozzle Adjustment at Tip Pickup Position
2.Ｅｊｅｃｔ Nozzle Adjustment at Tip Removal Position
3.Ｐｒｅｓｓｕｒｅ Nozzle Adjustment at Air Leak Test Position
4.Ｄｒｏｐ－Ｔ Table Adjustment at Drop Position
5.Ｄｒｏｐ－９ Nozzle Adjustment at CH9 Drop Position
6.Ｄｒｏｐ－１ Nozzle Adjustment at CH1 Drop Position
7.ＣＮＴＲＦＧ Centrifuge F/B Stand-by Position Adjustment
8.Ｃｕｖｅｔｔｅ Nozzle Adjustment at Sampling Position
6.Ｉｎｐｕｔ Entering Machine Information
7.Ｕｎｉｔ Single Mechanism Test
8.ＳＵＢＡ／Ｄ 1.Ｐｒｅｓｓ Air Leak Detection Test with A/D printing
2.Ｓａｍｐｌｅ Liquid Level Detection Test with A/D printing
3.Ｓａｍｐｌｉｎｇ Sampling Test with A/D printing
4.Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅ Barcode Reading Test with A/D printing
9.Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ Initializing Machine Information
0.Ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒ Entering Total Operation Cycles
2.Ｏｐｔｉｃａｌ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Optical System Information
2.Ｔｅｓｔ Optical System Test
3.Calibrate / 4.Calibrate2 Optical System Calibration / Optical System Calibration 2
5.Ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ 1.Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ Checking Optical System Calibration

6.Ｃｈｅｃｋ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Optical System Contamination Level
2.Ｉｎｐｕｔ Setting Optical System Contamination Level
3.Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ Entering Optical System Contamination Level
7.Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ Initializing Optical System Information
3.ＬＣＤ LCD Test
4.Ｂｕｚｚｅｒ Buzzer Test
5.Ｐｒｉｎｔｅｒ Printer Test

6.ＢＣＲ Hand-held Bar Code Reader Test
7.Ａ／Ｄ Head Amp Test
8.ＣＮＴＲＦＧ 1.ＲＯＴ（１） Centrifuge Rotation Speed Adjustment
2.ＲＯＴ（２） Centrifuge Rotation Positioning Adjustment
3.Ｆ／Ｂ Centrifuge F/B Speed Adjustment
9.ＴＥＭＰ Temperature Adjustment and Check
5.Ｐａｃｋａｇｅ Packaging Preparations
6.Ｅｒｒｏｒ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing the Trouble Log
2.Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ Deleting the Trouble Log
7.Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ 1.Ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔ Initializing Product Information
2.Ｏｐｔｉｃａｌ Initializing Service Parameters
3.Ｈａｒｄ Initializing Machine Information
4.Ｓｅｔｕｐ Initializing Option Parameters
5.Ｒｅｓｕｌｔｓ Deleting Measurement Results
6.Ｅｒｒｏｒ Deleting the Trouble Log
7.ＰＡＲＡＭ Initializing Service Parameters
8.ＡＬＬ Deleting and Initializing All Information
8.Ｖｅｒｕｐ Upgrade the Centrifuge
9.Ｆａｃｔｏｒｙ 1.Ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔ Entering Product Information
3-5 Rev.F
2. Basic Operation in the Service Mode

This section explains how to access and exit the service mode as well as basic operation for
screens frequently used.
2.1. To Access the Service Mode at Analyzer Startup

(1) Holding down [STOP], turn on power to the Analyzer. Release [STOP] when the acoustical tone is
heard. The below password screen appears on the Display. Enter “-4430-“ and press [ENTER].
Ｐａｓｓｗｏｒｄ＜＞
Ｃａｎｃｅｌ（ＳＴＯＰ）
(2) Correct entry of password displays the version information for a moment before changing to the main
menu of the service mode.
ＳＰＯＴＣＨＥＭ－ＥＺ
ＳＰ－４４３０Ｖｘ．ｘｘ
:
１．Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ２．Ｓｕｂｍｅｎｕ＋
３．Ｃａｌｉｂｒａｔｅ（０００）
★A plus sign (+) appears in the upper right-hand corner of the
Display to indicate that the Analyzer is in the service mode.
After replacing the ROM, the analyzer does not directly access the service mode when the
analyzer has been restarted and the password has been entered. First, a message regarding ROM
replacement appears on the Display. Press [ENTER] to internally update the ROM version. After
this, the Display will change to the main menu of the service mode.
Ｎｅｗｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ．Ｖｘ．ｘｘ

ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
:
Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ...
:
:
When power to the Analyzer is turned on, the analyzer checks the version of the sub CPU and
PMC. If something wrong is detected in the check, an error message will appear on the Display
after you enter the password. In this case, the analyzer will freeze up and keys will not respond to
touch; you must shut off power and replace the sub CPU and/or PMC.
When sub CPU version is wrong

ＳＵＢｖｅｒｓｉｏｎｅｒｒｏｒ．
Ｖ０．０６－＞Ｖ０．１０
When PMC version is wrong

ＰＭＣｖｅｒｓｉｏｎｅｒｒｏｒ．
Ｖ２．０４－＞Ｖ２．１１
The version number at the left of the arrow is for the currently mounted sub CPU or PMC,
whereas that at the right of the arrow is for the required version.
3-6 Rev.F
2.2. To Access the Service Mode from the Main Menu

(1) Holding down [MENU] on the main menu, press [STOP].
１．Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ２．Ｓｕｂｍｅｎｕ
３．Ｃａｌｉｂｒａｔｅ（１／１）
(2) The password entry screen will appear on the Display, so input “-4430-“ and press [ENTER].
Ｐａｓｓｗｏｒｄ＜＞
Ｃａｎｃｅｌ（ＳＴＯＰ）
(3) If the password is correct, the Display will change to the main menu of the service mode.
★A plus sign (+) appears in the upper right-hand corner of the
Display to indicate that the Analyzer is in the service mode.
2.3. Returning to the User Mode from the Service Mode

(1) With the main menu of the service mode on the Display, press [STOP]. A message will appear
asking you to confirm your action.
ＢａｃｋｔｏＵＳＥＲＭＯＤＥ？＋
Ｙｅｓ（ＳＴＡＲＴ）Ｎｏ（ＳＴＯＰ）
(2) Press [START]. If the analyzer is not ready to start up (mechanical tests, optical system tests and
temperature control processing have not been completed), as would be the case if you accessed the
service mode directly from analyzer startup, startup processing will begin.
Ｗａｒｍｉｎｇｕｐ... ／
If the analyzer is ready to start up, as would be the case if you accessed the service mode directly
from the user mode, only hardware is initialized.
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｉｎｇ... ／
(3) Once processing is completed, the Display changes to the main menu of the user mode.
※ To perform the measurement in the user mode, turn on the power to startup
the analyzer again.
2.4. Skipping Temperature Preparations at Power On

To start up the analyzer in the user mode, skipping temperature preparations, do the following.
(1) Holding down [START], turn on power to the analyzer. Release [STOP] when the acoustical tone is
heard. Version information will appear on the Display for a moment before changing to the main menu
of the user mode when startup processing is completed.
:
3-7 Rev.F
2.5. Basic Operation for Menus

This section explains how to operate service mode menus.
(Example screen)
The plus sign (+) in the upper right-hand corner of the Display indicates the analyzer is in the
service mode. In the lower right-hand corner, the screen number formed by selecting item
numbers appears. It is based on the order in which screens are selected. The screen number of
Main Menu is (000). For example, “431” means that the screen was selected in the order of the
th rd st
4 screen, the 3 screen and the 1 screen from the Main Menu.
(Keys)
・[START] ：Moves to the main menu.
If the main menu is already on the Display, pressing [START] moves it to the
Standby screen.
・[STOP] ：Returns to the previous screen. If the main menu is on the Display, the Display
・ changes to the user mode restore confirmation screen.
・[-] ：Moves to the next page. If this key is pressed with the last page displayed, the
・ Display returns to the first page.
・[MENU] ：Same as [-].
・[0]～[9] ：Proceeds to the next screen specified by pressing one of these keys.
・[MENU]+[STOP] ：Displays the password entry screen.
2.6. How to Select Items

This section explains how to select setting items from menus.
(Example screen)
Ｓｕｒｖｅｙ［ＯＦＦ］＋
The selected item number is shown in [ ]. “(i/n)” indicates the currently selected item (i)
against the total number of available selections (n).
(Example screen)
［Ｓ－０１：ＧＧＴ］＋
（１／３２）
(Keys)
・[START] ：Returns the item to its initial value.
・[STOP] ：Returns the item to its initial value and returns the Display to the previous screen.
・[ENTER] ：Completes your selection and moves the Display to the next screen.
・[MENU] ：Selects the previous item. If the first item has been selected, the selection moves to the last item.
・[-] ：Selects the next item. If the last item has been selected, the selection moves to the first item.
・[0] ：Returns the setting to the initial value.
・[2] ：Selects the last item.
・[4] ：Selects the previous item. If the first item has been selected, the selection moves to the last item.
・[6] ：Selects the next item. If the last item has been selected, the selection moves to the first item.
・[8] ：Selects the first item.
・[MENU]+[STOP] ：Returns all selections to the initial values and completes the settings.
・[MENU]+[ENTER] ：Completes all settings.
3-8 Rev.F
2.7. How to Enter Numerical Values

This section explains how to enter numerical values.
(Example screen)
ＬｉｍｉｔＬ＜１２３．４＞＋
Ｈ＜－５６７．８＞
Numbers are enclosed in < > and flush to the right side of the Display.
While numbers are being entered, they appear flush to the left side of the Display.
(Keys)
・[START] ：Returns the item to its initial value.
・[STOP] ：Returns the item to its initial value and moves the Display to the previous screen.
・[ENTER] ：Completes your entry and moves the Display to the next screen.
・[-] ：Before any numbers have been entered, enters a minus sign (-).
If any numbers have been entered, enter a decimal point (.).
・[0]～[9] ：Enters numerical values from 0 to 9.
・[MENU]+[STOP] ：Returns all entries to the initial values and completes the settings.
・[MENU]+[ENTER] ：Completes all settings.
2.8. How to Enter Text

This section explains how to enter text (character strings).
(Example screen)
ＩＤ＜ＡＢＣ＞＋
Text is enclosed in < > on the Display.
(Keys)
・[START] ：Returns the character string to the initial setting.
・[STOP] ：Returns the character string to the initial setting and moves the Display to the previous screen.
・[ENTER] ：Completes the entry and moves the Display to the next screen.
・[-] ：Moves the cursor forward 1 space.
・[0]～[9] ：Enters characters. A different character is entered each time a numeric key is pressed.
・ See the below table to see which alphabetic characters are under which keys.
For example, pressing [2] three times will display ｢2｣, ｢A｣, and ｢B｣ in that order,
ultimately entering ｢B｣.
・[MENU]+[STOP] ：Returns all character strings to the initial settings and completes the settings.
・[MENU]+[ENTER] ：Completes all entries.
keys characters
[0] 0 * ? # . , : ; ‘ - + / %
[1] 1
[2] 2 A B C a b c
[3] 3 D E F d e f
[4] 4 G H I g h i
[5] 5 J K L j k l
[6] 6 M N O m n o
[7] 7 P Q R S p q r s
[8] 8 T U V t u v
[9] 9 W X Y Z w x y z
3-9 Rev.F
2.9. How to Set the Date and Time

This section explains how to set the date and time.
(Example screen)
Ｄａｔｅ＜９９－０１－０１＞ＹＭＤ＋
Ｔｉｍｅ＜１２：００：００＞
The date and time are enclosed in < > on the Display.
(Keys) ※Dates are displayed always in the order of year-month-day.

・[START] ：Returns the date and time to the initial settings and moves the cursor to the year or
・ hour position.
・[STOP] ：Returns the date and time to the initial settings and moves the Display to the
・ previous screen.
・[ENTER] ：Completes the date and time settings, and moves the Display to the next screen.
・[-] ：Moves the cursor to the next entry position.
If the cursor is in the year position, it moves to the month position. If at the day
position, it moves to the year position.
・[0]～[9] ：Enters numeric values.
・[MENU]+[STOP] ：Returns all entries to the initial settings and completes the settings.
・[MENU]+[ENTER] ：Completes all the settings.
2.10. Confirmation Prior to Processing

In the service mode, you are prompted by a message to confirm some operations (YES/NO) before
processing is actually executed. You respond as to whether the analyzer should perform the operation
or not by pressing keys.
(Example screen)
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ？＋
Amongst these types of operations that require your confirmation are included setting
initialization and changes.
(Keys)
・[START] ：Executes processing.
・[STOP] ：Cancels processing.
3-10 Rev.F
3. Sub Menu
Selecting “Sub Menu” from the service mode’s main menu accesses submenus.
The service mode submenu contains the “Setup”, “Unit”, and “Range” items which do not appear in the
user mode. The “Mode” menu has “Strip” in addition to “Survey.” This section explains menu items that
appear in the service mode only.
(Sub Menu)
１．Ｒｅｓｕｌｔｓ２．ＰＡＲＡＭ＋
３．Ｍａｉｎｔｅｎａｎｃｅ（２００）
４．Ｍｏｄｅ５．Ｃｌｏｃｋ＋
６．Ｓｅｔｕｐ（２００）
７．Ｕｎｉｔ８．Ｒａｎｇｅ＋
（２００）
3.1. Mode
Selecting “Mode” from the submenu lets you change analyzer modes. The mode menu is displayed
first. From here, you can select “Survey” or, because this is the service mode, “Strip”. This section will
explain only “Strip”.
Mode Menu (Service Mode)

１．Ｓｕｒｖｅｙ２．Ｓｔｒｉｐ＋
（２４０）
(1) Strip
Selecting “Strip“ from the mode menu lets you change the Reagent Strip mode. There are three
Reagent Strip modes to choose form: “Normal”, “ND (ND paper)”, and “NOBAR (no barcode)”.
Ｓｔｒｉｐ［Ｎｏｒｍａｌ］＋
The Reagent Strip mode setting is only temporary. At power on, the Reagent Strip mode is
defaulted to “Normal”, but you change it to “ND” or “NOBAR” from the menus. However, when
power is turned off, the next time the analyzer is turned on, it starts up in the “Normal” mode.
▲Difference from SP-4420：

Items Nos. have been changed as follows to easily distinguish between ND and NOBAR,
and make it easier to remember numbers.
Special Reagent Strip SP-4420 SP-4430

ND S-41 , M-00 S-41 , M-31
NOBAR S-42 , M-00 S-42 , M-32
※“NOBAR” actually means “Ignore Barcode”, but to prevent confusion, the same name is used
for the mode.
3-11 Rev.F
3.2. Setup
Selecting “Setup” from the submenu lets you configure analyzer options. The setup menu is
displayed first. Here, you can select from “Print”, “Printer”, “Communication”, “BCR”, “Date”,
“Language”, “Tip”, “Others” and “Initialize”.
Setup Menu
１．Ｐｒｉｎｔ２．Ｐｒｉｎｔｅｒ＋
３．Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ（２６０）
４．ＢＣＲ５．Ｄａｔｅ＋
６．Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ（２６０）
７．Ｔｉｐ８．ＰＯＣＴ＋
９．Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ（２６０）
(1) Print
Selecting “Print” from the setup menu prints out a list of options and their settings for the
following menu items 2 to 6. After printing has been completed, the Display reverts back to the
setup menu.
(2) Printer
Selecting “Printer” from the setup menu lets you set printer options.
Settings Display Settable Values Initial Values
Printer On/Off Use OFF , ON ON
Density Depth 0～6 2
Number of copies Copy 1～10 1
Number of line feeds Feed 0～9 4
(Example screen)
Ｕｓｅ［ＯＮ］Ｄｅｐｔｈ＜２＞＋
Ｃｏｐｙ＜１＞Ｆｅｅｄ＜４＞

Even if “Printer On/Off” is turned off, other options can be set.
“Density“ is a new option.
“Number of line feeds” is factory-set to “4”.
(3) Communication
Selecting “Communication” from the setup menu lets you set communication options.
Communications On/Off Use OFF , ON OFF
Format Format 1,2 1
ID Output Format ID Format ID__ | __ID ID__
(Example screen)
Ｕｓｅ［ＯＦＦ］Ｆｏｒｍａｔ［１］＋
ＩＤＦｏｒｍａｔ［ＩＤ＿＿］
3-12 Rev.F

Even if “Communications On/Off” is turned off, other options can be set.
“Format“ is selected between “1” and “2”. These numbers respectively stand for normal
format and expanded format found on the SP-4410 and SP-4420, but since “normal” and
“expanded” have no significance here, they have been dropped. “1” and “2” come from SP1
and SP2 used with the Multi-printer MP-1.
▲ID Output Format：

SP-4430 outputs ID with left-alignment. However, SP-4410/20, right-alignment.
Therefore if perfect conversion with SP-4410/20 is required, change the format to
right-alignment.
「ＩＤ＿＿」……Left-alignment（SP-4430 initial setting）
「＿＿ＩＤ」……Right-alignment (SP-4410/20 convertible）
(4) BCR
Selecting “BCR” from the setup menu lets you set the following options for the Hand-held Bar
Code Reader.
Barcode Reader On/Off Use OFF , ON OFF
Starting Digit Start 1～32 1
Reading Digits Read 1～13 13
※When communicating with PC, Reading Digits becomes ten digits. Refer to the communication
specification for details.
(Example screen)
Ｕｓｅ［ＯＦＦ］＋
Ｓｔａｒｔ＜１＞Ｒｅａｄ＜１３＞
※When “Barcode Reader On/Off” is turned on, the below message is given on the ID entry
screen to let the user know that IDs can be entered from the Bar Code Reader. When this item
is turned off, the message does not appear and the Bar Code Reader cannot be used.
ＩＤ＜＞＋
ＢＣＲａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ
(5) Date
Selecting “Date” from the setup menu lets you set the date format.
Date format Date format MDY , YMD , DMY YMD
(Example screen)
Ｄａｔｅｆｏｒｍａｔ［ＹＭＤ］＋
※The date is output to the Display and Printer in the format selected here, but in external
communications it is remains in year-month-day format.
3-13 Rev.F
(6) Language
Selecting “Language” from the setup menu lets you choose the display language.
Display language Language English , Japanese , English
French , German ,
Italian , Spanish
(Example screen)
Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ＋
［Ｅｎｇｌｉｓｈ］
※ The language selected here will appear on the Display, but printouts and external
communications are always made in English.
(7) Tip
Selecting “Tip” from the setup menu lets you set when the analyzer should inform the operator
that the Tip Waste Case is full.
Tip Waste Case message Every < > times 0～99 5
(Example screen)
Ｔｉｐｃａｓｅｍｅｓｓａｇｅ＋
Ｅｖｅｒｙ＜５＞ｔｉｍｅｓ
※When set to “0”, the message is never displayed.
(8)Others
Selecting “Others” from the setup menu lets you set the following CARE LAB(*1) and Linkage
Printing options.
CARE LAB CARE LAB OFF , ON OFF
Linkage Print Link OFF , ON OFF
ID Entry Mode ID input 123+ABC | 123 123+ABC
Sample Tube Info. Printout SMPL tube PRN OFF | ON OFF
※ [ON] with Specification
No.4
Sample Tube Info. Output SMPL tube COMM OFF | ON OFF
Meas. with Expired Test Strip Invalid MEAS. OFF | ON OFF
Patient Name Printout Patient PRN OFF | ON OFF
Standard Value Printout Norm.Range.PRN OFF | ON OFF
Reagent Lot Management Lot management OFF | ON OFF
Measurable Count Measure count 1 ～ 255 25
Single Card Input Card Inp 1time OFF | ON OFF
QC Lockout QC lock out OFF | ON OFF
QC Meas. Effective CTRL expir DAY | MONTH MONTH
Interval Unit
Effective QC Term (days) d 1 ～ 255 1
Effective QC Term m 1 ～ 255 3
(months)
QC Meas. Effective /LOT CTRL ENB/ Lot OFF | ON OFF
3-14 Rev.F
(Example screen)
ＣＡＲＥＬＡＢ＜ＯＦＦ＞＋
Ｌｉｎｋ＜ＯＦＦ＞
ＩＤｉｎｐｕｔ［１２３＋ＡＢＣ］＋
※“Linkage Print” effects both printing and communications.

［OFF］：When the analyzer is commanded to print data, it actually outputs the data from the
Built-in Printer, but not to the CARE LAB. When the analyzer is commanded to send
data to the CARE LAB, it actually does that. Upon reception of data from the CARE
LAB, the analyzer under setting prints it provided the printer is ready.
［ ON］：When the analyzer is commanded to print data, it does not output the data from the
Built-in Printer but sends it to the CARE LAB (this requires the CARE LAB setting
being on). When the analyzer is commanded to send data to the CARE LAB, it
ignores the command. Upon reception of data from the CARE LAB, the analyzer
under setting prints it provided the printer is ready.
※Various functions are available when the analyzer is connected to a CARE LAB system and
“CARE LAB” is set to “ON”. For information about the CARE LAB system, see the CARE LAB
specification. This section explains only important things associated with the CARE LAB option.
・When “CARE LAB” is set to “ON”, measurement results are automatically output in CARE
LAB format (Format 3) and cannot be output in any other format.
※ ID Entry Mode can be used to set the alphabet entry.

With［123+ABC］setting, alphabet can be entered using the numeric keys.
With［123 ］setting, only figures can be entered.
※Linkage printing can be set [ON] only when CARE LAB is [ON].
Although the linkage printing is [ON], if the CARE LAB setting is [OFF] the entry cannot
be confirmed.
※ID Entry Mode is always available to set regardless the CARE LAB setting.
Even though the CARE LAB is [OFF], the ID Entry Mode is available to set.
※‘Sample Tube Info. Print’ or ‘Sample Tube Info. Output’ settings can be turned ON when
you need to include the container type (cuvette or centrifuge cup) in the measurement
results printout or for external output.
※‘Meas. with Expired Test Strip’ setting enables measurements to be performed for a
maximum of 3 months after the expiration date of the test strip. When this setting is
ON, a screen appears to confirm continued use of expired test strips, if 3 months have
not passed since the expiration date. If the user selects ‘YES’, measurements can be
performed. If the user selects ‘NO’, measurements can no longer be performed. If
measurements are performed after the expiration date, such information will be
included in the measurement results printout and for external output.
※Patient Name Printout: Japan only setting
3-15 Rev.F
※ Standard Value Printout: Addition of function allowing the printing of measurement

results within standard ranges
※Reagent Lot Management: Addition of a function limiting the number of measurements

after magnetic card swiping.
※Single Card Input: Japan only setting
※QC Lockout: Addition so that if after a certain time has elapsed after running a control
measurement, if another control measurement is not performed, measurement will be
disabled. (Default setting: OFF) (*2)
Addition of function that allows switching between control and normal measurement by
pressing the ‘7’ key when QC Lockout is set to ON and the standby screen is displayed.
※QC Meas. Effective /LOT: Addition of a function requiring control measurements after
reagent lot changes, without which measurement is disabled (Default setting: OFF) (*2)
Note: (*1) The system CARE LAB is available and supported only in Japan.
(*2) A special magnetic card is required for control measurements but since no
control (calibration check) is sold, this function cannot currently be used.
(9) Initialize
Selecting “Initialize” from the setup menu lets you initialize all options in a single operation. A
message will first appear asking whether to initialize settings or not.
Pressing [START] initializes all option settings and returns the Display to the setup menu.
Pressing [STOP] returns to the setup menu without initializing anything.
3.3. Unit
Selecting “Unit” from the submenu lets you set unit parameters. The unit parameter menu is
displayed first. Here, you can select from “Print”, “Input”, “Initialize” and “SI”.
Unit Parameter Menu

１．Ｐｒｉｎｔ２．Ｉｎｐｕｔ＋
３．Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ（２７０）
４．ＳＩ＋
（２７０）
(1) Print
Selecting “Print” from the unit parameter menu lets you print service parameter settings.
An item selection screen appears first. Select an item as was explained in 2.6 “How to Select
Items” to print the desired parameter settings.
The selectable items include “ALL SINGLE (all Single Reagent items)”, “ALL MULT (all Multi
Reagent items)”, and “ND/NOBAR (special Reagent Strip)” as well as individual test items read
from the magnetic cards.
When printing has been completed (or suspended), the item selection screen appears again.
(2) Input
Selecting “Input” from the unit parameter menu lets you set unit parameters. An item selection
screen appears first. Select an item as was explained in 2.6 “How to Select Items”.
3-16 Rev.F
When the subsequent screen appears, set the unit referring to the below table.
・Single Reagent item

Item Name Name Text (5 Characters) Magnetic Card Data
Conversion Unit Unit mg｜SI｜User “mg”
Decimal Places for Common (See screen example.) 0～3 Magnetic Card Data
Unit
Decimal Places for SI Unit (See screen example.) 0～3 Magnetic Card Data
Symbol for User Unit (See screen example.) Text (6 Characters) Same as Common Units
Coefficient of Conversion for (See screen example.) 0.0～10000.0 1.0
User Units
Decimal Places for User (See screen example.) 0～3 Same as Common Units
Unit
・Multi Reagent item

Reagent Strip Name Name Text (10 Characters) Magnetic Card Data
You can select any item read from magnetic cards and “ND/NOBAR” for special Reagent Strip.
(Example screen)
Ｕｎｉｔ（ｍｇ）【ＩＵ／Ｌ】＋
Ｓ－１３Ｋｕ【１．００００】＜０＞
Ｕｎｉｔ（ＳＩ）【ｕＫａｔ／Ｌ】＋
Ｓ－１３Ｋｕ【０．０１６７】＜２＞
Ｕｎｉｔ（Ｕｓｅｒ）＜ＩＵ／Ｌ＞＋
Ｓ－１３Ｋｕ＜１．００００＞＜０＞
When entry has been completed (or suspended), the item selection screen appears again.
3-17 Rev.F
(3) Initialize
Selecting “Initialize” from the unit parameter menu lets you initialize unit parameters. An item
selection screen appears first. Select an item as was explained in 2.6 “How to Select Items”, to
initialize the desired parameter.
Reagent items)”, and “ND/NOBAR (special Reagent Strip)” as well as the individual test items
read from the magnetic cards.
When processing has been completed, the item selection screen appears again.
(4) SI
Selecting “SI” from the unit parameter menu lets you select a batch setting unit. Select a batch
setting unit item from the below table. This overrides “Conversion Unit” individually set for the
Single Reagent Strip items from the magnetic card, and makes the units the same type for all
those items (common unit, SI unit, or that set as SI-1 or SI-2). Usually, “SI” is factory-set in order
to change the “Conversion Unit” settings for all Single Reagent items in line with equipment
specifications.
ＳＩｕｎｉｔ＜０＞＋
※ “Batch Setting Unit” is set as “0” - “3”. These settings function as follows.
Batch Setting Unit item Unit that is set

0 Switches the unit of all single items to [common unit] regardless
the setting of ＜SI-1＞ and ＜SI-2＞
1 Switches the unit of all single items to that of ＜SI-1＞
2 Switches the unit of all single items to that of ＜SI-2＞
3 Switches the unit of all single items to [SI unit] regardless the
setting of ＜SI-1＞ and ＜SI-2＞
＜Example＞
When the setting of ＜SI－1＞ and ＜SI－2＞ is as follows,
Item A | Batch SI-1=[mg ] SI-2=[mg ] | from ＜Unit parameter printing＞
Item B | Batch SI-1=[mg ] SI-2=[SI ] |
Item C | Batch SI-1=[SI ] SI-2=[SI ] |
the unit setting is switched to the followings with the setting value of (Batch Setting Unit〉.
Unit that is set
Batch Setting Unit item
Item A Item B Item C
0 mg（common unit） mg（common unit） mg（common unit）
1 mg（common unit） mg（common unit） SI（SI unit）
2 mg（common unit） SI（SI unit） SI（SI unit）
3 SI（SI unit） SI（SI unit） SI（SI unit）
3-18 Rev.F
3.4. Range
Selecting “Range” from the submenu lets you set measurement range parameters. The
measurement range parameter menu is displayed first. Here, you can select from “Print”, “Input” and
“Initialize”.
Measurement Range Parameter Menu

３．Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ（２８０）
(1) Print
Selecting “Print” from the measurement range parameter menu lets you print service parameter
settings. An item selection screen appears first. Select an item as was explained in 2.6 “How to
Select Items” to print the desired parameter settings.
When printing has been completed (or suspended), the item selection screen appears again.
(2) Input
Selecting “Input” from the measurement range parameter menu lets you set measurement range
parameters. An item selection screen appears first. Select an item as was explained in 2.6 “How
to Select Items”. If a Single Reagent Strip item is selected, the subsequent screen appears; set
the parameters listed in the below table. If a Multi Reagent Strip item is selected, cannot be
changed.
Measurement range lower limit Limit L 0.0～10000.0 Basic parameter
Measurement range upper limit H 0.0～10000.0 Basic parameter
You can also select any item read from magnetic cards or “ND/NOBAR” for special Reagent
Strip.
When entry has been completed (or suspended), the item selection screen appears again.
(3) Initialize
Selecting “Initialize” from the measurement range parameter menu lets you initialize
measurement range parameters. An item selection screen appears first. Select an item as was
explained in 2.6 “How to Select Items” to initialize the desired parameter. However, if a Multi
Reagent item is selected, it is not possible to initialize the parameters.
When initialization has been completed (or suspended), the item selection screen appears
again.
3-19 Rev.F
4. Adjustments
Selecting “Adjust” from the service mode’s main menu lets you check operation and make adjustments for
the analyzer hardware and individual components such as Optical System, Display, Buzzer, Printer and
Barcode Reader. You can also print out parameters related with those components.
The adjustment menu is displayed first. Here, you can select from “Hard”, “Optical”, “LCD”, “Buzzer”,
“Printer”, “BCR”, “A/D”, “CNTRFG” and “TEMP”.
Adjustment Menu
１．Ｈａｒｄ２．Ｏｐｔｉｃａｌ＋
３．ＬＣＤ（４００）
４．Ｂｕｚｚｅｒ５．Ｐｒｉｎｔｅｒ＋
６．ＢＣＲ（４００）
７．Ａ／Ｄ８．ＣＮＴＲＦＧ＋
９．ＴＥＭＰ（４００）
4.1. Hardware Adjustment

Selecting “Hard” from the adjustment menu lets you adjust analyzer hardware. A hardware menu is
displayed first. Here, you can select from “Print”, “Origin”, “Test”, “Sensor”, “Adjust”, “Input”, “Unit”,
“SUB A/D”, “Initialize” and “Counter”.
Hardware Menu
１．Ｐｒｉｎｔ２．Ｏｒｉｇｉｎ＋
３．Ｔｅｓｔ（４１０）
４．Ｓｅｎｓｏｒ５．Ａｄｊｕｓｔ＋
６．Ｉｎｐｕｔ（４１０）
７．Ｕｎｉｔ８．ＳＵＢＡ／Ｄ＋

９．Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ（４１０）
０．Ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒ＋
（４１０）
(1) Print
Selecting “Print” from the hardware menu lets you print out all hardware information that can be
set with “Adjust”. When printing has been completed, the Display reverts back to the hardware
menu.
(2) Origin
Selecting “Origin” from the hardware menu lets you return all hardware to its origin. As parts
return to origin, a message to that effect appears on the Display.
If a Tip has been attached to the Nozzle, it is removed. It the Analyzer fails to remove the Tip,
trouble is detected and origin return stops without retrying to remove the Tip.
When origin return has been completed, the Display reverts back to the hardware menu.
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｉｎｇ... ／＋
3-20 Rev.F
(3) Test
Selecting “Test” from the hardware menu lets you test the hardware. A hardware test menu is
displayed first. Here, you can select from “Tip”, “Press”, “Centrifuge”, “Sample”, “Barcode”,
“Sampling” and “Drop”.
Hardware Test Menu

１．Ｔｉｐ２．Ｐｒｅｓｓ＋
３．Ｃｅｎｔｒｉｆｕｇｅ（４１３）
４．Ｓａｍｐｌｅ５．Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅ＋
６．Ｓａｍｐｌｉｎｇ（４１３）
７．Ｄｒｏｐ＋
（４１３）
There are seven tests to choose from in the hardware test menu.
Operations executed in hardware tests

Displayed item Test procedure
Ｔｉｐ Tip pickup >> Detection >> Discard
Ｐｒｅｓｓ Air leak check
Ｃｅｎｔｒｉｆｕｇｅ Centrifuge rotation >> Stopping
Ｓａｍｐｌｅ Tip pickup >> Detection >> Liquid level detection
Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅ Barcode reading
Ｓａｍｐｌｉｎｇ Tip pickup >> Detection >> Liquid level detection >> Sampling
Ｄｒｏｐ Tip Pickup >> Detection >> Liquid level detection >> Sampling >> Dropping
Selecting a test from the hardware test menu displays a test screen. You can either execute the
test in steps by selecting a specific operation with the keys and pressing [ENTER] or press
[START] to execute to the full series of operations. Testing can be stopped at any time by
pressing [STOP].
Example Test Screen

Ｔｉｐｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅｔｅｓｔ＋
Keys used in hardware tests
・[START] ：Runs the full series of operations.

・[STOP] ：If a test is in course, stops testing.
If a test is not running, returns hardware to its origin and reverts the Display back
to
the hardware test menu.
・[ENTER] ：Executes only selected operations.
・[0] ：Returns related hardware to its origin.
・[9] ：Opens and closes the Table Cover.
3-21 Rev.F
Hardware tests perform trouble checks. But, hardware is not returned to its origin if any trouble
is detected; therefore you must press [0] to return hardware to its origin.
If you are executing operations step-by-step and then press [START], the operations from that
point forward will be executed until completion. Also, if the Table Cover is open when either
[ENTER] or [START] is pressed, it will first close before the specified operation starts.
※ If the liquid level test is run from “Sample”, the liquid level from the Nozzle’s vertical origin is
printed out as a number of pulses (distance).
Example liquid level printout

----------------------------------
Sample level pulse = 300(25.59mm)
----------------------------------
※If “Barcode” is selected without the barcode gain necessary for reading being set, the message
shown below appears on the Display. Pressing [ENTER] will automatically set barcode gain.
Ｇａｉｎｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ＋
Barcode is not set in the below two situations.

・When the service mode is accessed at power on.
・When trouble occurs during warm-up that prevents barcode gain from being set.
※When the barcode reading operation has been completed, the analyzer prints out Multi and
Single Reagent Strip information, including the item, No. and name of the Reagent Strip defined
in the barcode data. In special cases, such as there being no reagent strip or a reading error
occurring, data is printed as follows.
・If no Reagent Strip was detected, the No. reads “0” and the name “NO STRIP”.
・If a reading error occurs, the No. reads “255” and the name “MIS READ”.
(Trying to read barcodes when ND paper is used will result in an reading error.)
・If there was no magnetic card information for the read reagent strip, the read No. is printed
out for the No. and “NO DATA” for the name.
Example barcode data printout

----------------------------------
Multi = [ 1] <PANEL-2 >
Single(CH7) = [ 0] <NO STRIP>
(CH8) = [255] <MIS READ>
(CH9) = [ 35] <Amy >
----------------------------------
Item No. Item Name(Magnetic Card Data)
3-22 Rev.F
※When [DROP] is selected, a drop channel menu is displayed from which you can select the
channels on which to perform the drop test. On the drop channel menu, enter a “1” for each
channel, from CH9 to CH1, to be tested or a “0” to leave out of the test. (Numerical values are
entered as explained in 2.8 “How to Enter Text”.) Then, when [ENTER] is pressed, the
hardware is returned to its origin and the drop test screen displayed. The drop test screen is
displayed to let you know which channels have been selected for the test.
Drop channel menu

Ｓｅｌｅｃｔｐｕｔｃｈａｎｎｅｌ.＋
＜１１１１１１１１１＞
Example showing CH1 and CH7 selected for the drop test
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔｐｕｔｃｈａｎｎｅｌ.＋

＜００１０００００１＞
CH9 CH1
Drop test screen

Ｓａｍｐｌｅｄｒｏｐｔｅｓｔ＋
【００１００００００１】
※The [NOBAR] setting is used as the sample volume in drop tests. 127 drop pulses in “NOBAR”
equal 5 µl. This drop volume is used also in liquid level detection and sampling to compute the
required sample volume.
3-23 Rev.F
(4) Sensor
Selecting “Sensor” from the hardware menu lets you check Sensor status. Sensor status is
updated in real-time (every 250 msec), with ON indicated as “1” and OFF as “0”.
At first, ALL in the lower right-hand corner will read “---” because some of Motor Origin Sensors
will be on and others off depending on the situation. Pressing [START] drives the system so that
all Motor Origin Sensors turn on. However, the Centrifuge Rotation Sensor may be off depending
on the situation. The same can occur with the Cuvette Detection Sensor and Tip Tray Sensor.
Pressing [START] again drives the system so that Motor Origin Sensors turn off. From thereafter,
every time [START] is pressed, the Sensors switch between on and off, with status being
displayed accordingly.
Pressing the [-] key turns excitation on and off for the Nozzle Left-Right Drive Motor and Table
Motor. “POW” at the lower left of the Display reads the excitation status: “ON” or “OFF.”
Pressing [ENTER] displays a screen specifically for the topmost listed Sensor. ”P1” means all
Sensors are displayed, with Sensor No. 1 on the left and No. 12 on the far right (see below table).
On individual sensor screens, the name of the Sensor is displayed on the left and its on/off status
on the right. Every time [ENTER] is pressed, the Display switches in numerical order through the
individual sensors until reaching the end, at which point all Sensors are displayed again.
Sensor status check screen (Status displayed for all Sensors)
Sensor No.1 Sensor No.12
［ＰＩ］＝【００００１０１０００００】＋
ＰＯＷ＝［ＯＮ］ＡＬＬ＝［―――］
Sensor status check screen (Status displayed for specific Sensor)

［Ｃｏｖｅｒ（Ｔ）］＝【ＯＮ】＋
ＰＯＷ＝［ＯＮ］ＡＬＬ＝［ＯＮ］
Descriptions of Sensors
Sensors No. Displayed test Descriptions

1 Pump Pump Motor Origin Sensor
2 NZZL L/R Nozzle Left-Right Drive Motor Origin Sensor
3 NZZL U/D Nozzle Vertical Drive Motor Origin Sensor
4 Table Table Motor Origin Sensor
5 CNTR F/B Centrifuge Base Motor Forward-Back Sensor
6 CNTR ROT Centrifuge Rotation Motor Rotation Sensor
7 CNTR LIM Centrifuge Base Limit Switch (Centrifuge Rotation Interlock)
8 Tip Tip Pickup Detection Sensor
9 Cuvette Cuvette Detection Sensor
10 Tip tray Tip Waste Tray Detection Sensor
11 Cover(T) Table Cover Open-Close Sensor
12 Cover(M) Maintenance Cover Detection Sensor
3-24 Rev.F
Keys used in sensor status checks
・[START] ：Switches Motor Origin Sensors between on and off.

・[STOP] ：Returns hardware to its origin and reverts the Display to the hardware menu.
・[ENTER] ：Switch the sensor screen.
“PI” >> “Pump” >> “NZZL L/R” >> … >> “Cover (M)” >> “PI”
・[-] ：Turns excitation on and off for the Nozzle Left-Right Drive Motor and Table Motor.
・[0] ：Returns the specific hardware back to its origin.
◆If the Table Cover is open when the hardware test menu is accessed, it may not
open and close as desired. In such case, return hardware to its origin using [Origin].
3-25 Rev.F
(5) Adjust
Selecting “Adjust” from the hardware menu lets you set hardware drive pulse. The pulse
adjustment menu is displayed first. Here, you can select from “Pick up”, “Eject”, “Pressure”,
“Drop-T”, “Drop-9”, “Drop-1” and “CNTRFG”.
Pulse Adjustment Menu

１．Ｐｉｃｋｕｐ２．Ｅｊｅｃｔ＋
３．Ｐｒｅｓｓｕｒｅ（４１５）
４．Ｄｒｏｐ－Ｔ５．Ｄｒｏｐ－９＋
６．Ｄｒｏｐ－１（４１５）
７．ＣＮＴＲＦＧ８．Ｃｕｖｅｔｔｅ＋
（４１５）
There are eight position operations to choose from in the pulse adjustment menu.
Positioning operations executed in pulse adjustments
Displayed item Adjusted position Operated hardware
Ｐｉｃｋｕｐ Tip pickup position Nozzle Up-Down/Left-Right
Drive Motors
Ｅｊｅｃｔ Tip eject position Nozzle Up-Down/Left-Right
Drive Motors
Ｐｒｅｓｓｕｒｅ Air leak test position Nozzle Up-Down/Left-Right
(Rubber pad position) Drive Motors
Ｄｒｏｐ－Ｔ Table drop position Table
Ｄｒｏｐ－９ CH9 drop position Nozzle Up-Down/Left-Right
Drive Motors
Ｄｒｏｐ－１ CH1 drop position Nozzle Up-Down Drive Motors
ＣＮＴＲＦＧ Centrifuge F/B Stand-by Position Centrifuge Forward-Back
Ｃｕｖｅｔｔｅ Cuvette Sampling Position Nozzle Up-Down/Left-Right
Drive Motors
When an adjustment item is selected from the pulse adjustment menu, the Table Cover opens
and the standby screen for that position adjustment is displayed.
Example position adjustment standby screen
Ｔｉｐｐｉｃｋｕｐ＋
Ｍｏｄｅ（ＭＥＮＵ）
Keys used when the position adjustment standby screen is displayed

・[START] ：Closes the Table Cover and moves the Nozzle (left-right) and Table to the set position.
・[STOP] ：Closes the Table Cover, initializes the related hardware and returns the Display to the
hardware menu.
・[MENU] ：Switches the adjustment mode.
When [START] is pressed, the Table Cover closes and the adjustment screen is displayed.
Then, after the involved hardware has returned to its origin, the Nozzle (right-left) and Table move
to the set position. In drop position adjustment for CH9 and Ch1, the Tip is picked up
automatically. With Nozzle vertical adjustment, pressing [START] moves the Nozzle vertical to the
set position. Hardware can be fine-adjusted forward-back, left-right and up-down with [2], [4], [6]
and [8], to set the number of pulses. In fine-adjustment, pressing the [-] key switches the pulse
increments between 1, 10 and 100. (Switching is not available in Centrifuge F/B Adjustment)
Pressing [ENTER] updates the set number of pulses, opens the Table Cover and automatically
switches to fine-adjustment mode. (For example, in Tip pickup position adjustment, pressing
[ENTER] moves the Tip removal position adjustment.)
3-26 Rev.F
However, in CH9 drop position adjustment, when [ENTER] has been pressed, the system
switches to CH1 drop position adjustment without opening the Table Cover.
Example pulse adjustment screen

Ｔｉｐｐｉｃｋｕｐ［１］＋
ＬＲ【２００】ＵＤ【３３３】
Keys used in pulse adjustment

・[START] ：Moves the Nozzle vertically to the set position.
(If the Table Cover is open, it closes and the Nozzle (left-right) and Table move to
the set position.)
・[STOP] ：Stops the hardware if moving.
If hardware is still, returns it to its origin and reverts the Display back to the hardware menu.
・[ENTER] ：Updates the set number of pulses for the concerned hardware and opens the Table Cover.
(The adjustment mode changes automatically.)
・[-] ：Switches the drive pulse increment (1 >> 10 > 100 >> 1)
・[0] ：Returns the concerned hardware to its origin and moves the Nozzle (left-right) and
・ Table to the set position.
・[2] ：Lowers the Nozzle. Moves the Table forward.
・[4] ：Moves the Nozzle to the left.
・[6] ：Moves the Nozzle to the right.
・[8] ：Raises the Nozzle. Moves the Table backward.
・[5] ：(when arranging CH1/CH9 drop position) Moves the Table forward and backward.
※ The set number of pulses is not updated unless [ENTER] is pressed. If you revert back to the
hardware menu using [STOP] without first pressing [ENTER], the set number of pulses is not
updated.
※ Depending on the position, preparations may be needed to make adjustments. (For more
information, see Chapter 6 “Adjustments”.)
●Tip drop position: With the Table Cover open, set the Standard Tip in the Tip hole and press
[START].
●Table drop position: With the Table Cover open, set the Dummy Reagent Strip in and press
[START].
●CH9/CH1 drop position: With the Table Cover open, set the Tip in the Tip hole and press
[START]. The Tip is picked up automatically and moves to the Ch9 or CH1 drop position.
※ At the time of arrangement for CH1/CH9 drop position, pressing [5] key moves the Table
forward and backward, which allows you to check if the tip touches to the Table.
※ See [Chapter 6 Adjustments] for the details of each adjusting position.
3-27 Rev.F
(6) Input
Selecting “Input” from the hardware menu lets you let set the number of pulses for driving
hardware position adjustments. The number of pulses is, basically, the same as that set with
“Adjust”. However, centrifuge time can only be set from “Input”.
Pulse settings that can input here are given below.

Tip pickup position(Up-Down) Pick up U/D 0 ～ 999 pulse 345 pulse
(Left-Right) L/R 0 ～ 999 pulse 578 pulse
Tip eject position(Up-Down) Eject U/D 0 ～ 999 pulse 265 pulse
(Left-Right) L/R -99 ～ 999 pulse -30 pulse
Air leak test position(Up-Down) Pressure U/D 0 ～ 999 pulse 320 pulse
(Left-Right) L/R 0 ～ 999 pulse 700 pulse
Table drop position Table Drop 0 ～ 999 pulse 693 pulse
CH1 drop position Drop (CH1)U/D 0 ～ 999 pulse 95 pulse
CH9 drop position(Up-Down) Drop (CH9)U/D 0 ～ 999 pulse 95 pulse
(Left-Right) L/R 0 ～9999 pulse 1000 pulse
Cuvette sampling position (Up-Down) Cuvette U/D 0 ～9999 pulse 356 pulse
(Left-Right) L/R 0 ～9999 pulse 458 pulse
Centrifuge time - 1 CNTRFG time 0 ～2550 sec 120 sec
[10 sec unit]
Centrifuge time - 2 (2) 0 ～2550 sec 180 sec
（at LDH,CPK measurement） [10 sec unit]
Centrifuge time - 3 (3) 0 ～2550 sec 20 sec
（at re-test without centrifuge） [10 sec unit]
Centrifuge F/B Stand-by Position CNTRFG F/B -5 ～ 5 0
Pulse entry screen (7 screens in all)

ＰｉｃｋｕｐＵ／Ｄ＜３４５＞＋
Ｌ／Ｒ＜１５０＞
ＥｊｅｃｔＵ／Ｄ＜２６５＞＋

Ｌ／Ｒ＜５＞
ＰｒｅｓｓｕｒｅＵ／Ｄ＜３２０＞＋

Ｌ／Ｒ＜７００＞
ＴａｂｌｅＤｒｏｐ＜６９３＞＋

Ｄｒｏｐ（ＣＨ１）Ｕ／Ｄ＜１０５＞
Ｄｒｏｐ（ＣＨ９）Ｕ／Ｄ＜１０５＞＋

Ｌ／Ｒ＜１０００＞
ＣｕｖｅｔｔｅＵ／Ｄ＜３５６＞＋

Ｌ／Ｒ＜４５８＞
ＣＮＴＲＦＧｔｉｍｅ＜１８０＞＋

（２）＜１８０＞
（３）＜２０＞＋
ＣＮＴＲＦＧＦ／Ｂ＜０＞
When pulses have been entered for all items, the new settings are saved and the Display reverts
back to the hardware menu. To cancel the entry, press [STOP] while the first page is on the
Display. The Display will revert back to the hardware menu without changing anything.
3-28 Rev.F
※Pulse to distance relationship is as follows.
Nozzle Left-Right movement : 1 pulse = 0.1 mm

Nozzle Up-Down movement : Y = 15 –16.5 tan (42.3 – 0.25 X)
[X: Descend pulses, Descent distance]
Table movement : 1 pulse = 0.026 mm
(7) Unit
Selecting “Unit” from the hardware menu lets you move individual unit. This feature gives you
continuous drive control over specific units. Pressing the [hyphen] key switches to another unit.
Pressing [0] initializes the selected unit. If [ENTER] is pressed after the initialization, the unit
moves the maximum distance. Pressing [START] repeats initialization and maximum stroke
movement until [STOP] is pressed.
Units that can be selected for individual movement

Display Descriptions
Ｐｕｍｐ Plunger Pump
ＮＺＺＬＬＲ Nozzle Left-Right movement
ＮＺＺＬＵＤ Nozzle Up-Down movement
ＣＮＴＲＦＢ Centrifuge Base forward-back movement
Ｔａｂｌｅ Reagent Table movement
ＣＮＴＲＲＴ Centrifuge rotation
Unit control screen

Ｕｎｉｔ【Ｐｕｍｐ】＋
Ｕｎｉｔ（－）
Keys for controlling individual unit movement
・[START] ：Continuously drives the unit. The selected unit repeats origin return and maximum
・ stroke movement.
・[STOP] ：Stops a unit in motion.
・ If units were stopped, reverts the Display back to the hardware menu.
・[ENTER] ：Drives the unit for a single stroke. The selected unit moves the maximum stroke.
・[-] ：Switches the unit.
・[0] ：Initializes the selected unit.
※To test Reagent Table operation, move the Centrifuge Base forward so that the Door is open.
Performing the test with the Door closed inhibits movement and leads to trouble.
(8) SUB A/D

Selecting “SUB A/D” from the hardware menu lets you print out Sub CPU A/D.
Sub A/D Menu is displayed first. From here, you can select “Press”, “Sample”, “Sampling” or
“Barcode”.
Sub A/D Menu

１．Ｐｒｅｓｓ２．Ｓａｍｐｌｅ＋
３．Ｓａｍｐｌｉｎｇ（４８０）
４．Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅ＋
（４８０）
3-29 Rev.F
This function performs the same operations as hardware tests, the only difference being that you
can print out A/D data to check it. Tests and printout are done in the same way as hardware tests.
※ For an example printout of Sub CPU A/D data, see “Service Parameters Printout” in “Printing
Specifications” of the Appendix.
(9) Initialize
Selecting “Initialize” from the hardware menu lets you initialize hardware information.
A message is displayed first asking whether to initialize the information or not.
Press [START] to initialize all hardware information or [STOP] to forgo initialization and revert
back to the hardware menu.
(10) Counter
Selecting “Counter” from the hardware menu lets you set the total cycles for the entire system
and individual motors. Cycle count is updated with each measurement. This information is useful
towards knowing when to replace motors. Setting the cycle counter of a newly replaced motor to
“0” helps you keep track of motor usage and performance.
Settable counters are given below.

System measurement cycles ALL
Pump Motor total cycles Pump
Nozzle Up-Down Drive Motor total cycles NZZL U/D
Nozzle Left-Right Drive Motor total cycles L/R 0 ～ 65535 0
Reagent Table Motor total cycles Table
Centrifuge Base Motor total cycles CNTRFG F/B
Centrifuge Rotation Motor total cycles CNTRFG ROT
Counter setting screen (4 pages in all)

ＡＬＬ＜１２３４５＞＋
Ｐｕｍｐ＜０＞
ＮＺＺＬＵ／Ｄ＜６２００＞＋

Ｌ／Ｒ＜６２００＞
Ｔａｂｌｅ＜１２３４５＞＋
ＣＮＴＲＦＧＦ／Ｂ＜１２３４５＞
ＣＮＴＲＦＧＲＯＴ＜５８２０＞＋
3-30 Rev.F
4.2. Optical System Adjustments and Checks

Selecting “Optical” from the adjustment menu lets you operate the optical system. A menu of optical
system operations is displayed first. Here, you cans elect “Print”, “Test”, “Calibrate”, “Confirm”,
“Check” and “Initialize”.
Optical System Operations Menu

１．Ｐｒｉｎｔ２．Ｔｅｓｔ＋
３．Ｃａｌｉｂｒａｔｅ（４２０）
４．Ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ５．Ｃｈｅｃｋ＋
６．Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ（４２０）
(1) Print
Selecting “Print” from the optical system operations menu lets you print out Optical System
information: reflectance off the Standard Reagent Strip used in Optical System calibration and
reflectance off white and black plates that is determined by this calibration.
・Reflectance off Standard Reagent Strip ········· RL, RH

・Reflectance off white and black plates ··········· RB, RW
When data has been printed out, the Display reverts back to the optical system operations
menu.
(2) Test
Selecting “Test” from the optical system operations menu lets you test the Optical System. In
tests, you can display A/D counts –Nref, Dref, Nsmp, Dsmp – for all wavelengths and all
channels with the Reagent Table in various positions and the Photometry Unit Head Amp at
various gain levels.
The below screen is displayed first and the Reagent Strip Table moves forward to the White
plate measurement position.
Ｇ＝［ＡＵＴＯ］Ｔ＝［ＷＨＩＴＥ］＋
Ｇａｉｎ（０－７，８）Ｔａｂｌｅ（９）
The “G” on the top line of the screen stands for gain. Gain is defaulted to automatic control
(“AUTO”), but it can be changed from 0 - 7 (“ALL0” - “ALL7”) using the [numeric] keys. The gain
setting is applied to all wavelengths and channels. Pressing [8] restores automatic gain control.
When data has been printed out, the Display reverts back to the optical system operations menu.
※Automatic gain control is not set when you access the service mode at power on, therefore
gain will be “0” for all channels and not “AUTO”.
The “T “on the top line of the screen stands for Table position. Pressing [9] turns the Table to the
Reagent Strip set position (“FRONT”) >> Reagent Strip measure position (“STRIP”) >> white plate
measurement position (“WHITE”) >> black plate measurement position (“BLACK”) >> Reagent
Strip set position (“FRONT”).
Pressing [START] starts measurement and, a few seconds later, prints out the counts for all
wavelengths and channels. A message is displayed while printing is in progress. (Printing cannot
be suspended halfway through.) When the data has been printed out, the Display reverts back to
the original screen.
Pressing [STOP] reverts the Display back to the optical system operations menu.
※ For an example printout, see “Service Parameters Printout” in “Printing Specifications” of the
Appendix.
3-31 Rev.F
※The following data is printed in tests performed here.

(1) Dsmp is too high in the black plate measurement position.
...… Light may be penetrating from somewhere. If 300 or higher, “E-33 Stray light” appears
on the Display.
(2) No difference in Nsmp is detected between the white plate measurement position and the
black plate measurement position. Or Nsmp at the black plate measurement position is
higher.
...… The black and white plates were in the wrong places when calibrating the Optical
System. Or, the plates are dirty and need cleaning. If left attended, “E-05 Optical error
“ may be displayed.
(3) Gain was set to “0” or “7” in one or more measurement positions when printing was done
under automatic gain control (“AUTO”).
...… LEDs are not considered effective at 0 or 7 gain. Measurements can be made, but if left
unattended, “T-12 Optical gain” may be displayed. LED luminosity need adjusting. If
adjusting is ineffective, the LEDs must be replaced.
(4) Nref was too low or too high in one or more measurement positions when printing was done
under minimum gain control (“0”).
...… When Nref is 1282 or less, “T-14 LED intensity (Low)” is displayed. When Nref is 20475
or higher (printing is possible only up to 20475), “ T-14 LED intensity (High)” is
displayed. LED luminosity need adjusting. If adjusting is ineffective, the LEDs must be
replaced.
※ Optical gain has 8 degrees, which is described as G. For convenience, when G=0 Gain is 1.00.
G Gain
0 1.00
1 1.55
2 2.25
3 3.10
4 4.10
5 5.25
6 6.50
7 7.80
(3-1) Calibrate
<Software Version 1.00 or later> (include Software Version 2.04 or later)
<Preparation>
95658 REF STRIP PACKING(EZ)････････････････････････････････････････････････1 pc
Selecting “Calibrate” from the optical system operations menu lets you calibrate the Optical
System.
The first thing you need to do is to enter reflectance RH(405), RL(405), … RH(802) and RL(802)
for the wavelengths (5 in all) of Standard Reagent Strip H (STD-W) and Standard Reagent Strip L
(STD-D).
ＲＨ（４０５）＜１．０００＞＋
ＲＬ（４０５）＜０．０００＞
When all data has been entered, the Table Cover opens and instructions are displayed. Set the
Standard Reagent Strips L and H according to the displayed information. Pressing [START]
closed the Table Cover and starts the first measurement. When measurement has been
completed, the Table Cover opens and the next instructions are displayed.
3-32 Rev.F
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（１／３）＋
Ｓｔａｒｔ（ＳＴＡＲＴ）
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（２／３）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（３／３）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（１／３＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（２／３）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（３／３）＋
Ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅｄ．＋
When all measurements have been completed, the Table Cover opens and an end message is
displayed. Remove the Standard Reagent Strips and press [ENTER]. The Table Cover closes
and the Display reverts back to the optical systems operations menu.
(3-2) Calibrate2
<Software Version 2.04 or later>
<Preparation>
100531 REF STRIP PACKING2(EZ)･･･････････････････････････････････････････････1 pc
Selecting “Calibrate” from the optical system operations menu lets you calibrate the Optical
System.
The first thing you need to do is to enter reflectance RH(405), RL(405), … RH(802) and RL(802)
for the wavelengths (5 in all) of Standard Reagent Strip H (STD-W) and Standard Reagent Strip L
(STD-D).
ＲＨ（４０５）＜１．０００＞＋
ＲＬ（４０５）＜０．０００＞
When all data has been entered, the Table Cover opens and instructions are displayed. Set the
Standard Reagent Strips L and H according to the displayed information. Pressing [START]
closed the Table Cover and starts the first measurement. When measurement has been
completed, the Table Cover opens and the next instructions are displayed.
Note:For Ch1 through Ch6, place a calibration strip so that its end aligns with the groove on the
table(see photo below). For Ch7 through Ch9, place a calibration strip in the same way as a
single-item reagent strip.
Reference strip position Instrument display
[ In the photo above, STD-W reference

strip pad is located on the left side.]
3-33 Rev.F
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（１／９）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（２／９）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（３／３）＋
・・・
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（９／９）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（１／９）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（２／９）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（９／３）＋
・・・
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（９／９）＋
displayed. Remove the Standard Reagent Strips and press [ENTER]. The Table Cover closes
and the Display reverts back to the optical systems operations menu.
(4) Confirm
<Preparation>
95657 CHECK STRIP PACKING(EZ)････････････････････････････････････････････1 pc
Selecting “Confirm” from the optical system operations menu displays a menu of optical system
calibration checks. Here, measurements are made to confirm if the Optical System was correctly
calibrated or not.
Optical System Calibration Check Menu
１．Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ＋
（４２４）
Selecting “Measure” from the calibration checks menu lets you check how well the optical
system has been calibrated. In the check, measurement is made on ND Paper and reflectance is
printed out.
When the Table Cover opens, set the ND Paper according to the displayed instruction. Pressing
[START] closes the Table Cover and starts the first measurement.
ＮＤ（１／３）＋
ＮＤ（２／３）＋
ＮＤ（３／３）＋
3-34 Rev.F
When measurement has been completed, the Table Cover opens and the next instructions are
displayed. When all measurements have been completed, results are printed out, the Table Cover
opens and an end message is displayed. Remove the ND Paper and press [ENTER]. The Table
Cover closes and the Display reverts to the optical systems operations menu.
※This operation cannot be carried out if the optimal gain of optical system is not
set ( pressing [1] on the Optical System Calibration Check menu makes no
change on the screen) When entering in the service mode at the time of
turning on the power, be aware that the optimal gain setting is not carried out.
(5) Check
Selecting “Check” from the optical system operations menu displays a menu of optical
system dirt check. Here, printing, entering and recording of dirt check information
Optical System Dirt Check Menu
３．Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ（４２５）
①Print
Selecting “Print” from Optical System Dirt Check Menu lets you print out Optical System
Dirt Check information: Information memorized in order to perform Optical System Dirt
Check, the state of the Optical System after Optical System Calibration (Black Plate /White
Plate quasi-reflectance with Gain 0) and information obtained at the time of measurement,
the state of the Optical System at power on and measurement start. Dirt checking is made
based on the information.
②Input
Selecting “Input” from Optical System Dirt Check Menu lets you set the threshold used to
check the level of dirt in the Optical System.
The threshold setting screen（ Three screens）
Ｗｈｉｔｅｃｈｅｃｋ＜０．１００＞＋

Ｂｌａｃｋｃｈｅｃｋ＜０．０３０＞
Ｗｈｉｔｅ／Ｂｌａｃｋｃｈｅｃｋ＋
＜０．１００＞
Ｏｐｔｉｃａｌｃｈｅｃｋｌｅｖｅｌ＋

＜０．０３０＞
This check is made at power on and measurement start. If a difference in reflectance

(comparison of black and white plate quasi-reflectance) is detected in the Optical System
after calibration and when the check is run, “E-05 Optical error” is displayed. The threshold
used to make this evaluation is set here.
3-35 Rev.F

A) White Plate level White check 0 ～ 9.999 0.100
B) Black Plate level Black check 0 ～ 9.999 0.030
C) White／Black plate level White/Black Check 0 ～ 9.999 0.100
D) Level of dirt (Old) Optical check level 0 ～ 9.999 0.030
・The comparison of recorded white plate level and white plate level obtained at the time of
measurement is calculated, and the results of the calculation are compared with White
Plate level.
Qw: Comparison between memorized white plate A/D count and REF A/D count
Qw’: Comparison between white plate A/D count and REF A/D count at the time of
measurement
A) In case of ｜１－Qw’／Qw）｜≧White Plate level, NG （ More than 0.100(10%)）
・The Comparison of recorded black plate level and black plate level obtained at the time of
measurement and the results of the calculation are compared with Black Plate level.
Qb: Comparison between memorized black plate A/D count and REF A/D count
Qb’: Comparison between black plate A/D count and REF A/D count at the time of
measurement
B) In case of ｜Qb’－Qb｜≧Black Plate level, NG （ More than 0.030 count）
・The comparison of memorized white/ black plate level and white/black plate level at the
time of measurement is obtained and the results of the calculation are compared with
white/black plate level.
C) In case of ｜1－（（Qw’／Qb’）／（Qw／Qb））｜≧white／black plate level, NG
（More than 0.100:(10%)
D) Level of dirt (Old) is used to check the level of dirt with old specifications when the
information needed to check the level of dirt with new specifications is recoreded.
Error criteria
In order to distinguish LED light intensity change from contamination of the Optical System
（ White/Black Plate, Optical Window ） , see Judgment A), B) and C) to make a final
determination of whether or not ERROR occurred.
Condition Judgment A) Judgment B) Judgment C) ERROR

determination
1 ＯＫＯＫＯＫＯＫ
2 ＯＫＯＫＮＧＯＫ
3 ＯＫＮＧＯＫ ERROR
4 ＯＫＮＧＮＧ ERROR
5 ＮＧＯＫＯＫＯＫ
6 ＮＧＯＫＮＧ ERROR
7 ＮＧＮＧＯＫＯＫ
8 ＮＧＮＧＮＧ ERROR
3-36 Rev.F
③Memory
Selecting “Memory” from Optical System Dirt Check Menu lets you memorize Optical System
Dirt Check information.
Basically, Dirt Check information is memorized at the time of Optical System Calibration.
But when an instrument with 1.35 or older version of ROM is upgraded with 1.36 or later
version of ROM, Dirt check with new specifications can not be performed due to no memory of
necessary information in the instrument. In that case, necessary information has to be
memorized after any dirt or impurities are removed on measurement window, white plate
and black plate (like at the time of Optical System Calibration).
When the instrument is normally powered on, selecting “Memory” displays confirmation
screen
Ｓａｖｅ？＋
If you press “START”, Optical System Dirt Check information will be memorized ,and then
Optical System Dirt Check menu will appear. If you press ”STOP”, nothing will be done and
Optical System Operation Menu will displayed.
In case where the instrument is not turned on normally (ex. Error occurs in the Optical System
at power on or the instrument was turned on in CS mode), Dirt Check information can not be
memorized. Even if you select “Memory” from Optical Dirt Check Menu, nothing will start and
be performed.
(6) Initialize
Selecting “Initialize” from the optical system operations menu lets you initialize Optical System
information.
A message is displayed first asking whether to initialize the information or not.
Press [START] to initialize all Optical System information or [STOP] to forgo initialization and
revert back to the optical system operations menu.
3-37 Rev.F
4.3. LCD Test

Selecting “LCD” from the adjustment menu lets you test the Display. As shown below, all of the dots
are filled from left to right with the ON character (■).
After a few seconds, the Display reverts back to the adjustment menu.
4.4. Buzzer Test

Selecting “Buzzer” from the adjustment menu lets you test the Buzzer. Two types of buzzers will be
alternately sounded 4 times each. A message to that effect is displayed while the test is in progress.
(The test cannot be suspended halfway through.)
When the test has been completed, the Display reverts back to the adjustment menu.
4.5. Printer Test

Selecting “Printer” from the adjustment menu lets you test the Printer. As shown below, a dummy
printout is made of the 7 separate contrast levels. A message is displayed while printing is in progress.
(Printing cannot be suspended halfway through.)
------------------------------------
SP-4430 Vx.xx 1999-01-01 10:00
Test print xxxxxx
------------------------------------
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789
------------------------------------
When the test has been completed, the Display reverts back to the adjustment menu.
4.6. Hand-held Bar Code Reader Test

Selecting “BCR” from the adjustment menu lets you test reading with the Hand-held Bar Code
Reader. The reading test screen shown below is displayed first. When the Display looks like this, read
a barcode label using the Bar Code Reader. The read data will appear on the Display.
Hand-held Barcode Reader reading test screen
ＴＥＳＴ＜＞＋
ＢＣＲａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ
The test can be made even if the Hand-held Bar Code Reader has been turned off in the option
setting. The digits in this test are set to “1” for the far left digit and “13” for the far right digit (the option
setting is not applied here).
Press [STOP] to revert the Display from the reading test screen back to the adjustment menu.
3-38 Rev.F
4.7. Optical System A/D Head Amp Test

Selecting “A/D” from the adjustment menu lets you test the Optical System A/D Head Amp. A screen
like that below is displayed. Here, press [ENTER] to perform A/D conversion. A/D count will be
displayed for the specified channel (or REF), wavelength and gain. Press [MENU] + [START] to do the
conversion and print out results for all channels.
Optical System A/D Head Amp test screen
ＲＥＦ４０５Ｇ＝０１２５０＋

ＣＨ（０－９）Ｌ（ＭＥＮＵ）Ｇ（－）
・[START] ：Sets the luminosity balance check mode.

・[STOP] ：Reverts the Display to the adjustment menu.
・[ENTER] ：Displays A/D conversion results for the selected channel, wavelength and gain.
・[MENU] ：Changes the wavelength.
・[-] ：Changes gain.
・[0]～[9] ：[0] sets REF, whereas [1] - [9] sets channels Nos. 1 - 9.
・[MENU]+[START] ：Prints out A/D conversion results for all channels at the selected
・ wavelength and gain.
Pressing [START] sets the analyzer for checking luminosity balance on all channels. Pressing it
again moves the Table to the white plate measurement position and displays the below A/D count
threshold setting screen.
Ｘ＝［１４００］＋
Entering the threshold and pressing [ENTER] displays the below screen. A/D conversion is
performed on all channels (including REF) at the selected wavelength (gain is set to “0”) and any
channel that exceeds the previously set threshold is displayed. “_” is displayed for channels that do
not exceed the threshold.
Ｌ＝４０５Ｒ１２３＿５６＿８９＋
１４００Ｓｔｏｐ（ＳＴＯＰ）
The LEDs will flash at 5 sec intervals until [STOP] is pressed.

When [STOP] is pressed, the Table returns to its origin and the Display reverts back to the initial test
screen.
※ When the Optical System A/D Head Amp test is run, gain is initialized on all channels. If
measurements are then made without setting gain, “T12 Optical gain (Not Ready)” is displayed
because gain has not been set. To perform measurements, it is necessary to shut off power and
restart the system normally.
If the following occurs in the Optical System A/D Head Amp test, the Head Amp is possibly defective.
(1) A/D count is 0 or less even when wavelength and gain are changed.
(2) A/D count does not change when gain, wavelength and channel are changed and [ENTER] is
pressed.
Also, if no channels are displayed for any wavelength at a set luminosity balance threshold of “1400”,
it is possible that the LED optical axis is displaced or an optical fiber is bent.
3-39 Rev.F
4.8. Centrifuge Adjustment

Selecting [CNTRFG] from Centrifuge Adjustment Menu enables you to adjust the rotation speed,
rotation positioning pitch and forward/back speed.
[ROT(1)], [ROT(2)], and [F/B] are available to choose.
Centrifuge Adjustment Menu

１．ＲＯＴ（１）２．ＲＯＴ（２）＋
３．Ｆ／Ｂ（４２４）
(1) Centrifuge rotation speed adjustment

Selecting “ROT(1)” from the Centrifuge Adjustment Menu lets you test Centrifuge rotation speed.
A screen like that below is displayed. Here, pressing [START] starts Centrifuge rotation and
displays speed in 100 rpm units. Rotation speed is updated every second, so that displayed
speed was recorded for the previous second. This information can be used to adjust Centrifuge
rotation speed.
Centrifuge rotation speed test screen

ＣＮＴＲＦＧＣｏｎｆｉｒｍ＋
【１０１００】ｒｐｍ
・[START] ：Starts Centrifuge rotation.

・[STOP] ：Stops the Centrifuge when rotating. If the Centrifuge was stopped,
・ returns the Display to the adjustment menu.
The Centrifuge must rotate at about 95000 rpm when loaded with samples. Pipette 250 µL of distilled
water into the Centrifuge Tube and place it in the Centrifuge. If the Centrifuge rotates outside the 6000
- 16000 rpm range, trouble is indicated.
If speed cannot be adjusted above 95000 when the Centrifuge Tubes are not set, replace the motor.
※The centrifuge keeps rotating until [STOP] key is pressed. However, it stops when 4
minutes and 15 seconds passed after it started rotating, and then it starts rotating again.
This rotation slowdown might be seen like a failure of centrifuge, but it is not.
(2) Centrifuge rotation positioning pitch adjustment

Selecting [ROT(2)] from the Centrifuge Adjustment Menu lets you to adjust the centrifuge rotation
positioning pitch. The below test screen appears. Pressing [START]starts Centrifuge rotation
positioning for adjustment.
Adjustment screen for Centrifuge rotation positioning pitch

ＣＮＴＲＦＧＲＯＴ（２）＋
・[START] ：Starts Centrifuge rotation positioning

・[STOP] ：Stops the Centrifuge (when rotating)
Returns the Display to the adjustment menu (when stopped)
In this adjustment, the degree（angle）of one movement is adjusted.
3-40 Rev.F
(3) Centrifuge forward/backward speed adjustment

Selecting [F/B] from Centrifuge Adjustment Menu lets you to adjust the centrifuge
forward/backward speed. The below test screen appears. Pressing [START] moves the
centrifuge forward and backward for adjustment.
Adjustment screen for Centrifuge forward/backward speed
ＣＮＴＲＦＧＦ／Ｂ＋
・[START] ：Starts moving the centrifuge forward/backward.

・[STOP] ：Stops the Centrifuge (when rotating)
Returns the Display to the adjustment menu (when stopped)
In this adjustment, adjust the speed of Centrifuge for moving forward/back (one round trip)
when opening and closing the cover. If this speed greatly exceeds the standard range, an error
may occur when opening and closing the front cover or removing the tip.
4.9. Temperature Adjustment and Check

Selecting “TEMP” from the adjustment menu lets you check the temperature. A screen like that
below is displayed. Here, pressing the [-] key on and off the Fan. Pressing the [9] key opens and
closes the Table Cover.
Temperature Adjustment and Check screen
Ｔｅｍｐｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ＋
Ｆａｎ（－）［ＯＦＦ］
・[-] ：On and off the Fan.

3-41 Rev.F
5. Package
5.1. Preparations
Selecting “Package” from the service mode’s main menu moves hardware to its packaging position.
The hardware first returns to its origin, during which a screen is displayed. Then, hardware moves to
the packaging position. A screen is displayed in the meantime. When that has been completed, a
message to that effect is displayed. In this state, power can be shut off and the analyzer can be
packaged.
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｉｎｇ... ／＋
:
Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ... ／＋
:
Ｒｅａｄｙ．＋
Ｐｌｅａｓｅｔｕｒｎｏｆｆ．
If the analyzer is not intended for packaging, press [STOP] to return the hardware to its origin and
revert the Display back to the main menu.
6. Trouble Log
Selecting “Error” from the service mode’s main menu lets you print, clear and transmit the trouble log. A
menu of trouble log operations is displayed first. Here, you can select from “Print” and “Delete”.
Trouble Log Operations Menu

１．Ｐｒｉｎｔ２．Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ＋
（６００）
6.1. Printing the Trouble Log

Selecting “Print” from the trouble log operations menu lets you print out a log of troubles and errors
recorded in the analyzer’s memory. While printing is in progress, a message to that effect is displayed.
Pressing [STOP] cancels printing. When printing is canceled, the Display reverts back to the trouble
log operations menu.
※The trouble log contains the 30 most recently recorded troubles and errors. Printing begins from the
most recent and proceeds in chronological order. If the log is empty, a message to that effect is
printed out.
6.2. Clearing the Trouble Log

Selecting “Delete” from the trouble log operations menu lets you clear the entire trouble log. While
the log is being cleared, a message to that effect is displayed and operation cannot be cancelled.
When the log has been cleared, the Display reverts back to the trouble log operations menu.
3-42 Rev.F
7. Memory
Selecting “Memory” from the service mode’s main menu lets you initialize product information, optical
system information, hardware information, option settings and service parameter settings, and clear
measurement results and the trouble log. All of these operations can be performed in a single operation as
well. A menu of memory operations is displayed first. Here, you can select from “Product”, “Optical”, “Hard”,
“Setup”, “Results, “Error”, “PARAM” and “ALL”.
Memory Operations Menu

１．Ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔ２．Ｏｐｔｉｃａｌ＋
３．Ｈａｒｄ（７００）
４．Ｓｅｔｕｐ５．Ｒｅｓｕｌｔｓ＋
６．Ｅｒｒｏｒ（７００）
７．ＰＡＲＡＭ８．ＡＬＬ＋
（７００）
When operations are selected from the memory operations menu, a screen asking whether or not to
perform the selected operation is displayed first.
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ？＋ or Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ？＋
Ｙｅｓ（ＳＴＡＲＴ）Ｎｏ（ＳＴＯＰ）Ｙｅｓ（ＳＴＡＲＴ）Ｎｏ（ＳＴＯＰ）
Pressing [STOP] reverts the Display back to the memory operations menu without performing anything.
Pressing [START] performs the said operation. When the operation has been completed, a message to that
effect is displayed.
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅｄ．＋ or Ｄｅｌｅｔｅｄ．＋
ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
7.1. Initializing Product Information

Selecting “Product” from the memory operations menu lets you initialize product information. A
screen asking whether to initialize the information or not is displayed first. Pressing [STOP] reverts the
Display back to the memory operations menu without performing anything. Pressing [START]
initializes all product information. When the information has been initialized, a message to that effect is
displayed. Pressing [ENTER] reverts the Display back to the memory operations menu.
7.2. Initializing Optical System Information

Selecting “Optical” from the memory operations menu lets you initialize Optical System information.
(Processing is the same as when “(6) Initialize” is selected in 4.2 “Optical System Adjustments and
Checks”.) A screen asking whether to initialize the information or not is displayed first. Pressing
[STOP] reverts the Display back to the memory operations menu without performing anything.
Pressing [START] initializes all Optical System information. When the information has been initialized,
a message to that effect is displayed. Pressing [ENTER] reverts the Display back to the memory
operations menu.
7.3. Initializing Hardware Information

Selecting “Hard” from the memory operations menu lets you initialize hardware information.
(Processing is the same as when “(9) Initialize” is selected in 4.1 “Hardware Adjustment”.) A screen
asking whether to initialize the information or not is displayed first. Pressing [STOP] reverts the
Display back to the memory operations menu without performing anything. Pressing [START]
initializes all hardware information. When the information has been initialized, a message to that effect
is displayed. Pressing [ENTER] reverts the Display back to the memory operations menu.
3-43 Rev.F
7.4. Initializing Option Settings

Selecting “Setup” from the memory operations menu lets you initialize option settings. (Processing is
the same as when “(9) Initialize” is selected in 3.2 “Setup”.) A screen asking whether to initialize the
settings or not is displayed first. Pressing [STOP] reverts the Display back to the memory operations
menu without performing anything. Pressing [START] initializes all option settings. When the
information has been initialized, a message to that effect is displayed. Pressing [ENTER] reverts the
Display back to the memory operations menu.
7.5. Clearing Measurement Results

Selecting “Results” from the memory operations menu lets you clear all measurement results. A
screen asking whether to clear the information or not is displayed first. Pressing [STOP] reverts the
Display back to the memory operations menu without performing anything. Pressing [START] clears
all measurement results. When the information has been cleared, a message to that effect is
displayed. Pressing [ENTER] reverts the Display back to the memory operations menu.
7.6. Clearing the Trouble Log

Selecting “Error” from the memory operations menu lets you clear the trouble log. A screen asking
whether to clear the information or not is displayed first. (Processing is the same as in 6.2 “Clearing
the Trouble Log”.) Pressing [STOP] reverts the Display back to the memory operations menu without
performing anything. Pressing [START] clears the entire trouble log. When the information has been
cleared, a message to that effect is displayed. Pressing [ENTER] reverts the Display back to the
memory operations menu.
7.7. Clearing Parameters (Magnetic Card Data)

Selecting “PARAM” from the memory operations menu lets you clear Reagent Strip information and
other parameters read from magnetic cards. An item selection screen is displayed first. Here, select a
parameter as was explained in 2.6 “How to Select Items”. The selectable items include “ALL SINGLE
(all Single Reagent items)” and “ALL MULT (all Multi Reagent items)” as well as the individual test
items read from the magnetic cards. If “ND/NOBAR (special Reagent Strip)” is selected, the
information is initialized (not cleared).
A screen appears, asking whether to clear (or initialize) the information. Pressing [STOP] reverts the
Display back to the memory operations menu without performing anything. Pressing [START] clears
(or initializes) the selected parameter. When the information has been cleared, a message to that
effect is displayed. Pressing [ENTER] reverts the Display back to the memory operations menu.
7.8. Performing All Memory Operations

Selecting “ALL” from the memory operations menu lets you perform all operations described in 7.1 –
7.7.
A screen asking whether to perform the operations or not is displayed first. Pressing [STOP] reverts
the Display back to the memory operations menu without performing anything. Pressing [START]
performs the operations. When processing has been completed, a message to that effect is displayed.
Pressing [ENTER] reverts the Display back to the memory operations menu.
3-44 Rev.F
8. Upgrading the Centrifuge

8.1. Upgrade procedure
You can select (Ver up) in the main menu, but this will not work.
This option is for possible future use but cannot be used at present.
9. Product Information
Selecting “Factory” form Main Menu of “Service Mode” lets you input and print out Product
Information. First, Factory menu will be displayed from where “Product” can be selected.
Factory Menu
１．Ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔ＋
（９００）
9.1. Input・Print
Selecting “Product” from Factory Menu lets you input and print out Production Information.
The following information can be entered.

Serial No. SN Any string of characters Instrument serial
（6 characters） No.
Revision No. Rev 0～255 3
Specifications No. Spec 0～255 0
An example of screen with information entered.
ＳＮ＜１０９００１＞＋
Ｒｅｖ＜３＞Ｓｐｅｃ＜０＞
When input of the information is completed ( or canceled), the Product Information will be
printed out and Factory Menu will appear again.
※Revision No. is set as follows:
Rev No. Meaning

０ No revision/ No improvement has been done
１ Revision is done for improved centrifuge. Not ready for sub CPU problem.
２ No revision is done for improved centrifuge. Ready for sub CPU problem.
３ Revision is done for improved centrifuge. Ready for sub CPU problem.
※Specification No. represents the specification of basic information of reagent entered .
3-45 Rev.F
Chapter 4 Circuit Diagram
Refer to Circuit diagram(DWG No.23-01147)
Rev.F
PWA Name Rev.
No.
㵪㩷 ⋡ᰴ㧔Contents㧕
M
㵪㩷 ✚ว⚿✢࿑㧔Schematics㧕
㵪㩷 ⛘✼᭴ㅧ(The Insulated Construction) L
03㩷㔚Ḯ㧔POWER SOURCE㧕 D
02㩷 PMC㧔PMC㧕 D
01㩷 ࡔࠗࡦ㧔MAIN㧕 E
㵪㩷 ࡔࡕ࡝㧔Memory㧦F4㧕
㵪㩷 ࡔࡕ࡝㧔Memory㧦F4㧗S1㧕
05㩷 ࡄࡀ࡞㧔PANEL㧕 A
04㩷㩗㨹㩎㩨㨻㩧㩖㩩 A/D㧔HEADAMP_A/D㧕 C
06㩷 (New)శḮ LED(Light Source LED㧕̪1
06㩷 (Old)శḮ LED(Light Source LED㧕̪1 D
07㩷 ㆙ᔃᯏ㚟േ㧝(Centrifuge Drive㧝) B
09㩷 ㆙ᔃᯏ㚟േ 2㧔Centrifuge Drive㧞㧕 A
11㩷 ㆙ᔃᯏᬌ⍮㧔Centrifuge Detect㧕 B
12㩷 ࠠࡘࡌ࠶࠻ᬌ⍮㧔CUBET DETECT㧕
08㩷 ࡁ࠭࡞ਛ⛮㧔NOZZLE RELAY㧕 B
10㩷 ࡁ࠭࡞(NOZZLE) D
15㩷 ࡃ࡯ࠦ࡯࠼(BARCODE) A
㵪㩷 ࠹࡯ࡉ࡞(TABLE)
14㩷 PI㧔PI㧕
㵪㩷 PI㧔PI㧕㧖 for Nozzle relay PWA
̪
Select ̈LED PCB M (Item Code㧦98875)̉when you usëLED Wiring M (Item Code㧦98876)̉.
Select ̈LED PCB (Item Code㧦95881)̉when you usëLED Wiring (Item Code㧦95882) ̉.
M ChangëLight Source LED PWẢ 㧙 11.03.26 K.Moriyama
Schematics(Contents)
SP-4430 ✚ว⚿✢࿑(⋡ᰴ)
00.02.07 㧝
Tanji 23-01147 M
POC3T 3
⒖േࡕ࡯࠲ AC ࠕ࠳ࡊ࠲
J04
DCM 㧔AC ADAPTOR㧕 φ AC90㨪264㨂㧔50㨪60Hz㧕
24-00617
DC 01-01599 Table Table HEATER
FAN External THERMISTER Asm.
J05
DCM Hand-Held 24-00607
Communication
24-00602 Barcode Reader FG 01-01423
24-01889 RS-232C
㆙ᔃᯏ࿁ォࡕ࡯࠲ 24-00616 DC +12V INPUT B681-436 FG
㆙ᔃᯏ㚟േ㧞PWA ㆙ᔃᯏ㚟േ㧝PWA
㧔Centrifuge Drive2 PWA㧕㧔Centrifuge Drive1 PWA㧕 J10 J09 J08 J01 TABLE FPC
J12
㆙ᔃᯏᬌ⍮
PWA 01-01926 01-01924 01-01412
(Centrifuge RC02
J02
Detect PWA) 01-01416 01-01415
OPT BLOCK
01-01928 THERMISTER
01-01417 PWA03 24-00605
04-01711
J01
J07
B682 OPT BLOCK
PWA11 -510 㔚Ḯ PWA HEATER
J11
㧔POWER SOURCE PWA㧕
04-01691
01-01408
ࠠࡘࡌ࠶࠻ᬌ PWA09 PWA07
⍮ PWA
㧔CUBET
J01
J05
DETECT B680
PWA㧕 -154 SAMPLE_PD
J03
J01
J06
B682 ࡋ࠶࠼ࠕࡦࡊ A/D PWA
01-01418 24-
㧔04-01712㧕 J04 J02 J06 J03 -511 㧔HEADAMP A/D PWA㧕
01122
01-01412 01-01411
PWA12
J05
B682-516 B682-291 REFERENCE
24-00613 04-01687 _PD
೨ࠞࡃ࡯ᬌ⍮ RC01 PWA04 24-
࠴࠶ࡊⵝ⌕ᬌ⍮ J01
J03
01123
PI
B549-729 CN06 04-01681

శḮ LED PWA
ࡔࡦ࠹ࠞࡃ࡯ᬌ⍮ 㧔LIGHT SOURCE ࡄࡀ࡞ PWA
J02
J08
PI
B517-713 CN07 04-01672 _LED PWA㧕㧔PANEL PWA㧕01-01411 PWA05

01-05095
ᑄළࠤ࡯ࠬᬌ⍮
J04
J01 J02 J03 J09 J04 J05 J06 J07

PI
B549-729 B682-512 04-01444 01-01414

CN08 04-01681
PWA06
24-00001 J02 04- 04-
J03 J02 01448 01448
PWA13
CN03 CN02 CN01 CN04

J06
PI
CN10 B682-509 LED

PUMP PI B682-514
24-00611 PRINTER
J03
M ࡁ࠭࡞ਛ⛮ PWA
CN09 04-01581
PUMP MOTOR 㧔Nozzle ReLay PWA㧕
PMC PWA 24-00610
J01
J04
01-01419 J02 㔚Ḯ⋙ⷞ LED (LED)
Nozzle LR PI B682 㧔㧼㧹㧯 PWA㧕 ࡔࠗࡦ PWA
J05
PI
14㧙66801㧙07 -513 01-01409 㧔MAIN PWA㧕
J01
J01
PWA01 01-01657
01-01410
MEMBRANE SW
J04
PWA08
M
24-00620
Nozzle LR MOTOR PWA02 ࡔࡕ࡝㧔F4+S1㧕PWA ࡔࡕ࡝㧔F4㧕PWA
B680-153 㧔MEMORY PWA㧕㧔MEMORY PWA㧕 24-00609
J02
ࡁ࠭࡞ PWA 㧸㧯㧰

J01
01-03531 01-01156 01-03533 01-01154

㧔Nozzle PWA㧕
M RC03
CN11 01-01420
J03
J11 J12
NOZZLE UD PWA10 ⏛᳇ࠞ࡯࠼࡝࡯࠳(MCR)
MOTOR 24-00001 B649-102
04-01713 B682-508 04-01595 CN05
PWA14
J05
PI
CN13 B682-376
TABLE PI
M ChangëLight Source LED PWẢ 㧙 11.03.26 K.Moriyama

J06
M
CN12 TABLE MOTOR 04-01688
ࡃ࡯ࠦ࡯࠼ FPC Schematics

J07
J01
㧔BARCODE FPC㧕 B680-152

01-01421 SP-4430 ✚ว⚿✢࿑(✚ว⚿✢࿑)
PWA15
00.02.07 2
POC3T
Tanji 23-01147 3
M
AC ADAPTER SP-4430 ᮏయ
01-01599 㸦㸯㸶㸱㸧
+12V
㹌
GND
SG
G
FG SG
DC12V 50W
L Update 㸦Format 㸪Revision etc 㸧㸫 09.07.28 Y.Murashige
Schematics(The Insulated Construction)
SP-4430 ⥲ྜ⤖⥺ᅗ(⤯⦕ᵓ㐀)
00.02.07
3
Tanji 23-01147 L
POC3T 3
180ᶼ
180ᶼ
180ᶼ
620
180ᶼ
620ᶼ
330ᶼ 1200ᶼ 330 1200ᶼ
180ᶼ
180ᶼ
330ᶼ
620ᶼ 1200ᶼ
Light Source LED PCB
శḮ㪣㪜㪛䊒䊥䊮䊃࿁〝᧼
2010/10/04
1
POC3
K.Moriyama 01-05095 1
Ḙ
Chapter 5 Standard Checks

1. Check Items
Check Items ············································································································ 2
2. Instructions and Standards

(1) Switch Installation Check ···························································································· 3
(2) Sample Tube and Tip Setup Check ·············································································· 3
(3) Tip Waste Case Setup Check ······················································································ 3
(4) Front Panel Installation Check ····················································································· 3
(5) White/Black Plate Installation Check ············································································· 3
(6) Reagent Strip Setting/Removal Check ··········································································· 3
(7) Optical System Gap Check ························································································· 3
(8) Paper Cover Opening/Closing Check ············································································ 3
(9) Power On Display Check ···························································································· 3
(10) Warm-up Time Check ······························································································ 3
(11) Display Contrast Adjustment Check ············································································ 3
(12) Magnetic Card Operation Check················································································· 4
(13) Key Operation Check ······························································································· 4
(14) Front Panel Opening/Closing Check ············································································ 4
(15) Sample Tube Detection Check ··················································································· 4
(16) Reagent Barcode Reading Check ··············································································· 4
(17) Tip Attaching/Removal Check ···················································································· 4
(18) Sample Drawing/Discharge Check ·············································································· 4
(19) Battery Backup Check ······························································································ 4
(20) Pulse Setting Check ································································································ 5
(21) Fan Rotation Check ································································································· 5
(22) Printing Check ········································································································ 5
(23) Error Check ··········································································································· 5
(24) Temperature Control Check ······················································································ 5
(25) Measurement Check with Single Reagent Strips ···························································· 6
(26) Measurement Check with Multi Reagent Strip ······························································· 6
(27) Continuous Operation Check ····················································································· 7
(28) Optical System linearity Check ··················································································· 7
(29) Optical Calibration Curve Composition Check ······························································· 7
(30) Optical System Reproducibility Check ········································································· 7
(31) Reagent Strip Measurement Reproducibility Check ························································ 7
(32) Measurement Check for all Measurement Items ···························································· 7
(33) External communication Check ·················································································· 7
(34) Hand-held Bar Code Reader Check ············································································ 7
(35) Built-in Centrifuge Check ·························································································· 8
5-1 Rev.F
Chapter 5 Standard Checks SP-4430 SERVICE MANUAL
1. Check Items
Check Classification No. Check Items

Mechanism Checks 1 Switch Installation Check
2 Sample Tube and Tip Setup Check
3 Tip Waste Case Setup Check
4 Front Panel Installation Check
5 White/Black Plate Installation Check
6 Reagent Strip Setting/Removal Check
7 Optical System Gap Check
8 Paper Cover Opening/Closing Check
Function Checks 9 Power On Display Check
10 Warm-up Time Check
11 Display Contrast Adjustment Check
12 Magnetic Card Operation Check
13 Key Operation Check
14 Front Panel Opening/Closing Check
15 Sample Tube Detection Check
16 Reagent Barcode Reading Check
17 Tip Attaching/Removal Check
18 Sample Drawing/Discharge Check
19 Battery Backup Check
20 Pulse Setting Check
21 Fan Rotation Check
22 Printing Check
23 Error Check
24 Temperature Control Check
25 Measurement Check with Single Reagent Strips
26 Measurement Check with Multi Reagent Strip
27 Continuous Operation Check
28 Optical System linearity Check
29 Optical Calibration Curve Composition Check
30 Optical System Reproducibility Check
31 Reagent Strip Measurement Reproducibility Check
32 Measurement Check for all Measurement Items
33 External communication Check
34 Hand-held Bar Code Reader Check
35 Built-in Centrifuge Check
5-2 Rev.F
2. Instructions and Standards

(1) Switch Installation Check
How to Perform : Set the Power Switch in the on/off position, turn the contrast volume, and disconnect
and connect the Hand-held Bar Code Reader and External Output Cable several times
Standard : Switches should operate smoothly and connectors connect/disconnect smoothly without
catching or rattling.
(2) Sample Tube and Tip Setup Check

How to Perform : Set up and discard the Serum Sample Tube, 0.5 ml Micro Tube, Centrifuge Tube and
Tip.
Standard : Setup and discard should proceed smoothly without catching or rattling.
(3) Tip Waste Case Setup Check

How to Perform : Place about 5 Tips in the Tip Waste Case and detach and attach the Case.
Standard : It should be possible to attach and detach the Tip Waste Case smoothly and without
spilling the Tips.
(4) Front Panel Installation Check

How to Perform : Check the Front Panel is securely installed.
Standard : The Front Panel should not rattle or show signals of warping or distortion. No strange
noises should be emitted when the Panel is opened and closed. The Panel should close
tightly.
(5) White/Black Plate Installation Check

How to Perform : Pull out the Reagent Table and check the White and Black Plates are securely installed.
Standard : The Plates should be securely installed without rattling or gaps. The Plates themselves
should not be dirty.
(6) Reagent Strip Setting/Removal Check

How to Perform : Set and remove 1 Multi Reagent Strip and 3 Single Reagent Strips.
Standard : Reagent Strips should fit in and out of place smoothly.
(7) Optical System Gap Check

How to Perform : Evenly color the 3 parallel Pins for adjusting Reagent Table height with an oil-based
black marking pen. Pull the Table out and push it back in 5 times.
Standard : Markings of contact with all 3 pins should be detected in the Reagent Table.
(8) Paper Cover Opening/Closing Check

How to Perform : Open and close the Paper Cover.
Standard : The Cover should open and close smoothly without catching or rattling.
(9) Power On Display Check

How to Perform : Check the Display at power on.
Standard : As specified in the Operating Manual.
(10) Warm-up Time Check

How to Perform : Time how long it takes from power on until the main menu is displayed.
Standard : Within 10 min.
(11) Display Contrast Adjustment Check

How to Perform : Turn the Contrast Adjustment Knob on the analyzer rear and check that Display contrast
changes.
Standard : The Display should become darker when the Knob is turned clockwise, and brighter
when turned counterclockwise.
5-3 Rev.F
(12) Magnetic Card Operation Check

How to Perform : Get a Magnetic Card read screen as explained in the Operating manual, load a
Magnetic Card into the Analyzer and read it. Check settings.
Standard : It should be possible to load and read the Card smoothly without catching. The read
information should be correct.
(13) Key Operation Check

How to Perform : Check how Keys operate. Get the ID entry screen as explained in the Operating Manual
and check the below entry.
(1) Numeric values
(2) Text
(3) Symbols
Standard : It should be possible to enter all data. An acoustical tone should be heard with every
entry.
(14) Front Panel Opening/Closing Check

How to Perform : With the main menu displayed, press [START] to eject the Sample Unit and Reagent
Table. Then, press [STOP] to close the Sample Unit and Reagent Table.
Standard : The Front Panel should move smoothly without catching. When the Sample Unit and
Reagent Table close, they should be housed securely without rattling or gaps. The
Sample Unit and Reagent Table move smoothly without catching.
(15) Sample Tube Detection Check

How to Perform : Set a Reagent Strip on the Reagent Table and set up the Tip and Serum Sample Tube.
Start measurement. Then, set only the Reagent Strip and Tip, and perform measurement.
Standard : In the former case, sampling should be done from the Serum Sample Tube. In the latter,
sampling should be done from the Centrifuge position.
(16) Reagent Barcode Reading Check

How to Perform : Check whether barcodes on all types of Reagent Strips (multi, single, Japanese,
foreign) can be read.
Standard : Barcodes on all types of Strips should be read correctly.
(17) Tip Attaching/Removal Check

How to Perform : Check tip attaching and removal in measurement with a Single Reagent Strip.
Standard : During measurement, check the Tip is securely attached to the working face. After
measurement, the Tip should be properly discarded in the Tip Waste Case.
(18) Sample Drawing/Discharge Check

How to Perform : Check sample drawing and discharge in measurement with a Single Reagent Strip.
Standard : In sample drawing, liquid level should be properly detected and sample properly drawn.
In sample dropping, droplets should be properly formed and dropped without contacting
the Strip. After dropping, the stain on the Reagent Strip should not be uneven or to one
side.
(19) Battery Backup Check

How to Perform : Leave the analyzer with the power off for 9 hours or more. Turn power on and check the
date and time.
Standard : The calendar timer should function properly.
5-4 Rev.F
(20) Pulse Setting Check

How to Perform : Check the Nozzle is set to the center of each port in the sample amount check.
Standard : The Nozzle should be set in the center of each port and the drop should hit the Drop
Hole when dropped. The end of the Tip should not contact the surface of the Reagent
Strip and the drop should be dropped in the center of the Strip.
(21) Fan Rotation Check

How to Perform : Check Fan rotation.
Standard : With the main menu in the standby state, air should be blown from the fan. Strange
noises should not be heard. During measurement, the Fan should be still.
(22) Printing Check

How to Perform : Reprint out measurement data, and check operation and the quality of the printed data.
Standard : Information should be printed out without problems. Printed characters should be
complete and sharp.
(23) Error Check

How to Perform : (1) Perform measurement without a sample.
(2) Perform measurement without a Tip.
(3) Perform measurement without the Tip Waste Case.
(4) Perform measurement without Reagent Strips.
Standard : (1) “Error-17” should be displayed.
(2) “Trouble-20” should be displayed.
(3) “Error-38” should be displayed.
(4) “Error-11” should be displayed.
(24) Temperature Control Check

How to Perform : Check temperature of the Photometry Unit and Reagent Table.
Standard : Photometry Unit: 37.25±0.15℃
Reagent Table: 37.00±0.15℃
5-5 Rev.F
(25) Measurement Check with Single Reagent Strips

How to Perform :Set a Serum Sample Tube with purified water and run measurements with 3 Single
Reagent Strips. Check operation. The type of Reagent Strip is not important.
Standard : The below operations should be performed.
(1) Reagent Table: Black Plate measurement position.
(2) Reagent Table: White Plate measurement position.
(3) Reagent Table: Multi barcode measurement position.
(4) Reagent Table: Single barcode measurement position.
(5) Reagent Table: Measurement position (Completion check).
(6) Reagent Table: Drop position.
(7) Nozzle: Tip pickup position.
(8) Nozzle: Tip detection position.
(9) Nozzle: Sample draw position.
(10) Nozzle: Sample drop position (CH7).
(13) Reagent Table: Measurement position (Measurement).
(14) Nozzle: Tip discard position (Tip discard).
(15) Nozzle: Tip detection position (Discard check).
(16) Results printout.
(17) Reagent Table: Reagent Strip setting position (Front Cover open).
(26) Measurement Check with Multi Reagent Strip

How to Perform :Set a Serum Sample Tube with purified water and run measurements with 1 Multi
Reagent Strip. Check operation. The type of Reagent Strip is not important.
Standard : The below operations should be performed.
(1) Reagent Table: Black Plate measurement position.
(2) Reagent Table: White Plate measurement position.
(3) Reagent Table: Multi barcode measurement position.
(4) Reagent Table: Single barcode measurement position.
(5) Reagent Table: Measurement position (Completion check).
(6) Reagent Table: Drop position.
(7) Nozzle: Tip pickup position.
(8) Nozzle: Tip detection position.
(9) Nozzle: Sample draw position.
(16) Reagent Table: Measurement position (Measurement).
(17) Nozzle: Tip discard position.
(18) Nozzle: Tip detection position (Discard check).
(19) Results printout.
(20) Reagent Table: Reagent Strip setting position (Front Cover open).
5-6 Rev.F
(27) Continuous Operation Check

How to Perform : Set aging mode X and run continuous measurements for 24 hours or more.
Standard : Operation should continue without problems, stopping, errors or trouble.
(28) Optical System linearity Check

How to Perform : Set STD-W and ND paper (ND-8, 7, 5, 3) of a Single Reagent Strip and Multi Reagent
Strip (one sheet for each) on the Single and Multi Reagent Strip positions. Run
measurements in the ND mode with n = 1 for all wavelengths.
Standard : Reflectance for each ND pad should be within the tolerance range given in the below
table.
wavelengths STD-W ND-8 ND-7 ND-5 ND-3

405nm ±3% ±5% ±4% ±3% ±2%
550nm
575nm
±3% ±3% ±3% ±2% ±1.5%
610nm
820nm
(29) Optical Calibration Curve Composition Check

How to Perform : Set ND paper (ND-8, 5) of 3 Single Reagent Strips and 1 Multi Reagent Strip, and run
measurements in the ND mode with n = 1 for all wavelengths.
Standard : Separation range R for the reflectance in each ND pad should be less than 1.5% for
ND-8 and less than 1.0% for ND-5 on all 9 channels.
(30) Optical System Reproducibility Check

How to Perform : Set ND paper (ND-8, 5) of 3 Single Reagent Strips and 1 Multi Reagent Strip and run
measurements in the ND mode with n = 575 for wavelength of 575 nml.
Standard : After correcting the difference in reflectance between ND pads, CV should be less than
0.5% for ND-8 and less than 1.0% for ND-5 on all 9 channels.
(31) Reagent Strip Measurement Reproducibility Check

How to Perform : Run measurements using the GOT Reagent Strip and CAL-H with n = 10 on Single
Reagent Strip position channels CH7 - 9.
Standard : (1) All channels: CV < 5%
(2) Overall: CV < 6.5%
(3) Difference between CH: (Max. mean of each CH – Min. mean of each CH) / Total
mean x 100) < 6%
(32) Measurement Check for all Measurement Items

How to Perform : Run measurements on all Single Reagent Strip items with n = 1.
Standard : All items should result normal.
(33) External communication Check

How to Perform : Try sending and receiving data from a PC running a communication check program (not
included with the analyzer).
Standard : Data should be sent successfully without anything coming out garbled.
(34) Hand-held Bar Code Reader Check

How to Perform : Connect the Hand-held Bar Code Reader and read a barcode printed with a JAN13
code.
Standard : Data should be read successfully without anything coming out garbled.
5-7 Rev.F
(35) Built-in Centrifuge Check

How to Perform : Use the exclusive Centrifuge tube used for testing of upper/lower limit value of
centrifuge weight（L：200μL,H：300μL）and perform the centrifuge.
Standard : The Centrifuge speed falls in the standard range and no error occurs.
5-8 Rev.F
Chapter 6 Adjustments（Version 1.36 or later）

1. Adjustment Items and Tools ·····················································································2
2. Adjustments ···············································································································3
(1) Pulse Adjustment ······································································································ 3
(2) Pressure Detection Adjustment ·················································································· 14
(3) Optical System Adjustment ······················································································· 17
(4) Centrifuge Adjustment ····························································································· 25
(5) Temperature Adjustment ·························································································· 32
(6) Slide Prevention Screw for Pump-motor Adjustment ······················································· 35
(7) Nozzle Piping Adjustment ························································································· 36
(7-1) Pre-specification change: Lots up to S/N.41105099 ·················································· 36
(7-2) Post-specification change: lots from S/N.41106001 ·················································· 39
(8) Assembly position of Nozzle drive unit Adjustment ························································· 41
(9) Optical system calibration ························································································· 42
(9-1) Calibrate ········································································································· 42
(9-2) Calibrate2 ········································································································ 43
6-1 Rev.F
1. Adjustment Items and Tools
No. Adjustment Required Tools Drw./Model No.

(1) Pulse Adjustment
(1)-1 Tip Pickup Position Adjustment
(1)-2 Tip Removal Position Adjustment
(1)-3 Pressure Detection Position Adjustment
(1)-4 Table Drop Position Adjustment
(1)-5 Nozzle Drop Position Adjustment
(1)-6 Cuvette Sampling Position
（Nozzle Down-most Position）
(2) Pressure Detection Adjustment
(2)-1 Offset Adjustment
(2)-2 Air Leak test Check
(3) Optical System Adjustment
(4) Centrifuge Adjustment
(4)-1-1 Centrifuge Position Adjustment
(4)-1-2 Upgrade of Centrifuge Unit
(4)-1-3 Centrifuge F/B Pulse Adjustment
(4)-1-4 Centrifuge Installation Position
Adjustment
(4)-2 Forward-Back Motor Adjustment
(4)-3 Rotation Speed Adjustment
(5) Temperature Adjustment
(6) Sampling Pump Adjustment
(7) Nozzle Piping Adjustment
(8) Assembly position of Nozzle drive unit
(9) Optical system calibration 95658:Ref strip packing
(EZ) or 100531: REF strip
packing 2(EZ)
＊NOTE: Check if the drawings are updated.
6-2 Rev.F
2. Adjustments
(1) Pulse Adjustment
What to Prepare
・Multi Reagent Strip ································································································ 1
・Tip (Use one with 27±0.05mm in the total length) ························································ 1
Adjustment
Pulse can be adjusted for the below operations.
Displayed item Adjusted position Operated hardware

Ｐｉｃｋｕｐ Tip pickup position Nozzle Up-Down/Right-Left
Drive Motors
Ｅｊｅｃｔ Tip eject position Nozzle Up-Down/ Right-Left
Drive Motors
Ｐｒｅｓｓｕｒｅ Air leak test position (Rubber pad Nozzle Up-Down/ Right-Left
position) Drive Motors
Ｄｒｏｐ－Ｔ Table drop position Table
Ｄｒｏｐ－９ CH9 drop position Nozzle Up-Down/ Right-Left
Drive Motors
Ｄｒｏｐ－１ CH1 drop position Nozzle Up-Down Drive Motors
ＣＮＴＲＦＧ F/B stand-by position of centrifuge Centrifuge Forward-Back
Ｃｕｖｅｔｔｅ Cuvette Sampling Position Nozzle Up-Down/ Right-Left
（Nozzle Down-Most position） Drive Motors
Pulse ADJ Mode

Pulse adjustments are made from the pulse ADJ mode. The mode can be accessed as follows.
1. Holding down [STOP], turn on power. Enter “-4430-“ in the password screen and press [ENTER].
2. Software version will appear followed by the main menu.
3. Select “4. Adjust” from the main menu.
4. When the hardware menu reappears, select “5. Adjust”. The below screen will appear.
Pulse Adjustment Menu (3 pages in all, can be switched using the [-] key)
１．Ｐｉｃｋｕｐ２．Ｅｊｅｃｔ＋
３．Ｐｒｅｓｓｕｒｅ（４１５）
４．Ｄｒｏｐ－Ｔ５．Ｄｒｏｐ－９＋
６．Ｄｒｏｐ－１（４１５）
７．ＣＮＴＲＦＧ８．Ｃｕｖｅｔｔｅ＋
（４１５）
5. When an adjustment item is selected from the pulse adjustment menu, the Table Cover opens
and the standby screen for that position adjustment is displayed.
Example position adjustment standby screen
Ｔｉｐｐｉｃｋｕｐ＋
Ｍｏｄｅ（ＭＥＮＵ）
Keys used when the position adjustment standby screen is displayed

・[START] ：Closes the Table Cover and moves the Nozzle (left-right) and Table to the set position.
・[STOP] ：Closes the Table Cover, returns the involved hardware to its origin and reverts the
・ Display back to the hardware menu.
・[MENU] ：Switches the adjustment mode.
6-3 Rev.F
6. When [START] is pressed, the Table Cover closes and the adjustment screen is displayed. Then,
after the involved hardware has returned to its origin, the Nozzle (right-left) and Table move to the
set position.
Example pulse adjustment screen

Ｔｉｐｐｉｃｋｕｐ［１］＋
ＬＲ【２００】ＵＤ【３３３】
Keys used in pulse adjustment

・[START] ：Moves the Nozzle vertically to the set position.
(If the Table Cover is open, it closes and the Nozzle (left-right) and Table move to
the set position.)
・[STOP] ：Stops the hardware if moving.
If hardware is still, returns it to its origin and reverts the Display back to the hardware menu.
・[ENTER] ：Updates the set number of pulses for the concerned hardware and opens the Table
Cover.
(The adjustment mode changes automatically.)
・[-] ：Switches the drive pulse increment (1 >> 10 > 100 >> 1)
・[0] ：Returns the concerned hardware to its origin and moves the Nozzle (left-right) and
・ Table to the set position.
・[2] ：Lowers the Nozzle. Moves the Table forward.
・[4] ：Moves the Nozzle to the left.
・[6] ：Moves the Nozzle to the right.
・[8] ：Raises the Nozzle. Moves the Table backward.
＜NOTE＞
The set number of pulses is not updated unless [ENTER] is pressed. If you revert back to
the hardware menu using [STOP] without first pressing [ENTER], the set number of pulses is
not updated.
Before starting the operation, install the safety cover on the centrifuge unit.
In case of adjustment of Cuvvett sampling position, adjustment shall be performed
with the safety cover off the instrument.
6-4 Rev.F
(1)-1 Tip Pickup Position Adjustment

(1)-1-1. Nozzle Left-Right Position Adjustment
1. Remove the Maintenance Cover (Top and Side).
2. Select “1. Pickup” from the Pulse Adjustment Menu.
3. Set a Tip in the Tip Hole on the Centrifuge.
4. When [START] is pressed, the Front Cover closes and the Nozzle will stop above the Tip pickup
position. When in this position, align the end of the Nozzle and the Tip within the below tolerance.
Align to within : ±0.15 mm of center axis

5. Use [4] and [6] to move the Nozzle. The Nozzle moves at 0.1 mm/pulse.
(1)-1-2. Nozzle Up-Down Position Adjustment

<Old type>
1. Press [START]. The Nozzle will lower to the default position and stop.
2. In this position, the Nozzle is under the tension of a spring. The amount of tension is determined by the
positional relationship of the Nozzle and Nozzle Holder. (180 - 320 gf)
Distance between Nozzle and Nozzle Holder: A = 1.0 mm
3. Use [2] and [8] to adjust position. The Nozzle moves at 0.1 mm/pulse.
4. Check the Tip is securely attached to the Nozzle.
5. If it is OK, press [ENTER] to save the new setting. Press [STOP] to revert back to the hardware menu.
Bottom face of snap retainer
Top surface of Nozzle holder

Snap retainer
6-5 Rev.F
＜New type＞
2. In this position, the Nozzle is under the tension of a spring. The amount of tension is determined by
the positional relationship of the Nozzle and Nozzle Holder. (180 - 320 gf)。
Distanc : A =10.0±0.3mm
3. Use [2] and [8] to adjust position. Please make sure to adjust from top to bottom. The Nozzle
moves at 0.1 mm/pulse.
4. Check the Tip is securely attached to the Nozzle.
5. If it is OK, press [ENTER] to save the new setting. Press [STOP] to revert back to the hardware
menu.
Top surface of Spacer
Spacer
Bottom face of Nozzle holder
* In case that the centrifuge is replaced, tip pickup position adjustment, 4-1-2.
Upgrade of Centrifuge, procedure 5 [Confirmation of clearance for tip holder and
centrifuge upper] should be performed.
6-6 Rev.F
(1)-2 Tip Removal Position Adjustment

*This adjustment should be performed after Centrifuge F/B speed is adjusted.
(1)-2-1. Nozzle Right-Left Position Adjustment
1. Remove the Maintenance Cover (Top and Side).
2. Select “2. Eject” from the Pulse Adjustment Menu.
3. Attach a tip to the Nozzle while the front cover is open（If the tip pickup position is adjusted, this is not
necessary because the tip is already attached）.
4. Pressing [START］closes the front cover and the Nozzle stops at the right/left default position. And also
pressing [START］lowers the Nozzle at the right/left default.
Tip end
Inside wall of waste
5. At this time, make sure that the space between the tip and inside wall of waste case meets the
standard.
（Make sure that the tip doesn’t contact inside wall of waste case（centrifuge side））
Standard ： B= 3.5mm or more（inside wall of waste case）
7. When [START］is pressed, the Nozzle moves to the default position for up-down position adjustment
(just below the tip injector) and stops.
At this time, make sure that the space between the tip end and inside wall of waste case meets the
standard.
*If tip contacts inside wall of waste case (outside) a trouble of Nozzle U/D may occur. Make
sure that there is enough space between them.
6-7 Rev.F

1. Set the space between the top surface of tip and bottom of tip injector. Adjust the space (C in the
below picture) to meet the standard.
Standard ： 0.5mm ≦ C ≦ 1.0mm
3. Check the clearance. If it is OK, press [ENTER] to save the new setting. Press [STOP] to return to the
hardware menu.
Bottom of tip injector
Top surface of tip
6-8 Rev.F
(1)-3 Pressure Detection Position Adjustment

(1)-3-1. Nozzle Left-Right Position Adjustment
1. Remove the Maintenance Cover (Top and Side). Check the Tip is not attached to the Nozzle.
2. Select “3. Pressure” from the Pulse Adjustment Menu.
3. When [START] is pressed, the Front Cover closes and the Nozzle will stop above the pressure
detection position (white Rubber Pad).
4. Move the Nozzle to within the below distance from the center of the Rubber Pad (see the below
figure).
Distance from Rubber Pad center : Left 1/2 position
Front
6-9 Rev.F

<Old type>
positional relationship of the Nozzle and Nozzle Holder. (180 - 320 gf) (see the below figure)
Standard：E = 1.0mm
4. Check the clearance. If it is OK, press [ENTER] to save the new setting. Press [STOP] to revert back
to the hardware menu.
Bottom of snap retainer
Top surface of Nozzle holder Snap retainer
<New type>
positional relationship of the Nozzle and Nozzle Holder. (180 - 320 gf) (see the below figure)
Standard：E = 10.0±0.3mm
3. Use [2] and [8] to adjust position. Please make sure to adjust from top to bottom. The Nozzle moves
at 0.1 mm/pulse.
4. Check the clearance. If it is OK, press [ENTER] to save the new setting. Press [STOP] to revert back
to the hardware menu.
Top surface of Spacer
Bottom face of Nozzle holder Spacer
6-10 Rev.F
(1)-4 Table Drop Position Adjustment

1. Put “X” mark on CH1 and CH6 of Multi-Reagent strip and use the strip as a jig.
2. Remove the Upper Cover.
3. Select “4. Drop-T” from the Pulse Adjustment Menu.
4. Place the Multi-Reagent Strip on the Reagent Table while the Front cove is open.
5. Press［START］key to close the Front cover. The Reagent Table stops at the default position.
6. Make sure that the centerline of the Reagent Strip against the center of sample dropping position falls
within the standard.（Refer to Figure F）.
Distance from center of the Drop Hole: ±0.2 mm
7. Adjust it with [2] and [8] keys. The Reagent Table moves at 0.035mm/pulse.
8. After confirmation, press [ENTER] key to save the setting value. Remove the Reagent while the Front
cover is open. Press [STOP] key to return to the Hardware Menu.
(1)-5 Nozzle Drop Position Adjustment

(1)-5-1. Nozzle Right-Left Position Adjustment (CH9 only)
1. Remove the Upper Cover.
2. Select “5. Drop-9” from the Pulse Adjustment Menu.
3. Set a tip in the Tip hole on the Centrifuge while the Front cover is open.
4. Press［START］key to close the Front Cover. The Nozzle stops right above CH９.
5. At this time, make sure that the tip position is not out of the below standard. Move the Nozzle
to within the below distance form the center of sample dropping hole. (Refer to Figure G)
Distance from center of the Drop hole：±0.15mm
6-11 Rev.F
(1)-5-2. Nozzle Up-Down Position Adjustment (CH9)

2. Move the Nozzle down until the tip contacts the Table. Move it down 2 more pulses from the point
(Make sure that the tip end contacts the Table by moving the Table front and back with [5]）.
Standard：The number of pulses until the Nozzle hits the Table + 2
3. Use [2] and [8] to adjust position. Please make sure to adjust from top to bottom. The Nozzle
moves at 0.1 mm/pulse.
4. Check positioning. If it is OK, press [ENTER] to save the new setting.
(1)-5-3. Nozzle Right-Left Position Confirmation（CH1）

1. Press [ENTER] key at CH9 dropping position in Nozzle U/D Position Adjustment to stop the Nozzle
right above CH1.
2. Pressing [START] . The Nozzle will lower to the default position and stop.
3. Move the Nozzle down until the tip contacts the Table. Move it down 2 more pulses from the point.
（Make sure that the tip end contacts the Table by moving the Table front and back with [5]）.
Standard : The number of pulses until the Nozzle hits the Table +2
4. Use [2] and [8] to adjust position. Please make sure to adjust from top to bottom. The Nozzle moves
at 0.1mm/pulse.
5. Check positioning. If it is OK, press [ENTER] to save the new setting. Press [STOP] to return to the
Pulse Adjustment Menu.
6-12 Rev.F
(1)-6. Cuvette Sampling Position Pulse Adjustment（Nozzle Down-Most position ）

(1)-6-1．Nozzle Right-Left movement
1. Remove Maintenance cover（TOP,SIDE）. Confirm there is no tip in the nozzle.
2. Select “ 8, Cuvvtte” from Pulse Adjustment Menu.
3. Install the tip into the for-tip hole on the centrifuge with the front cover opened. Remove the safety
cover from the centrifuge. Do not install Cuvette.
4. Press［START］key, and the front cover will close. The nozzle will stop at Cuvette Sampling position
after the tip is installed.
5. At this stage, the center axis of the nozzle must be positioned within the range of ±0.2mm from the
center of the Cuvette port.
Standard ： Center axis is within ± 0.2mm
6. Use [4] and [6] keys to adjust the position. Nozzle Moving distance:0.1mm/pulse
(1)-6-2．Nozzle Up-Down Pulse Adjustment（Nozzle Down-Most Position）

1. Press [START] key, and the Nozzle will go down and stop at the default position.
2. At this stage, gap between the Nozzle holder and the upper surface of Cuvette port must be
adjusted within the standard range below.
Standard ： Distance = 3.7+/-0.3mm
3. Use [2] and [8] keys for adjusting the distance. Nozzle moving distance: Approx.0.1mm/pulse
4. After confirming the nozzle is positioned properly, press[ENTER] key to let the instrument
memorize the setting. Then press [STOP] key to go back to Hardware menu.
Nozzle Holder
3.7±0.3 mm
Cuvette Port
＜Caution＞
If you touch the turning rotor of the centrifuge, the position of the rotor could be off the
original position. In that case, manually move the rotor back to the original position.
Centrifuge cove is removed, so, going through Adjustment mode before re-positioning the
rotor will not let you complete Initialing operation when you try to initialize the information.
6-13 Rev.F
(2) Pressure Detection Adjustment

(2)-1 Offset Adjustment
1. Disconnect the Tube from the Nozzle Relay PWA Board before starting adjustment.
2. Connect a Tester to TP02 - TP03(GND) as shown below. Set the Tester to 20 mV DC (or similar range).
ＴＰ０２ＴＰ０３
3. Turn on power to the SP-4430.

4. Turn VR01 until the voltage across TP02 - TP03 is within the specified range. Turning the Varistor
clockwise lowers voltage, while turning it counterclockwise raises it.
・ Detection voltage range: 200±5 mV
6-14 Rev.F
(2)-2 Air Leak test Check
Sub CPU A/D Print Mode

The air leak test is checked in the sub CPU A/D print mode. That mode is accessed as follows.
2. Software version will appear followed by the main menu.
4. When the hardware menu reappears, select “8. SUB A/D”. The below screen will appear.
Sub CPU A/D Menu (2 pages in all, can be switch using the [-] key)
１．Ｐｒｅｓｓ２．Ｓａｍｐｌｅ＋
３．Ｓａｍｐｌｉｎｇ（４８０）
４．Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅ＋
（４８０）
Keys used in the sub CPU A/D print mode

・[START] ：Runs the full series of operations.
・[STOP] ：If a test is in course, stops testing.
If a test is not running, initializes the hardware and returns the Display to the
hardware
test menu.
・[ENTER] ：Executes only selected operations.
・[0] ：Returns the related hardware to its origin.
5. Select “1. Press” from the Sub A/D menu. The Nozzle returns to its origin and the air leak test
screen will appear.
ＰｒｅｓｓＡ／Ｄｔｅｓｔ＋
6-15 Rev.F
Test Procedure
(1) Check power to the SP-4430 is off.
(2) Do cleaning inside the nozzle and the rubber board. Check whether the Pipe is clogged or not.
Check whether the Tube came off or not.
(3) Securely connect the Tube to the Pressure Sensor (PS01) on the Nozzle Relay PWA.
(4) Turn on power to the SP-4430, get the Service Mode followed by the air leak test mode of the sub
CPU A/D mode.
(5) Press [START] to start the air leak test.
(6) When the test has been completed, the A/D count that the sub CPU used to detect pressure will be
printed out.
Example air leak test printout

------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 2000-03-13 12:34 ････ Analyzer name, ROM Ver., Date and Time of printing
Pressure A/D count Prot01 ････ Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
Norm. ････ Pressure A/D count [★1]
[01]135 [02]134 [03]136 [04]135 ･･････ Sampling A/D count(1st - 4th)
[05]135 [06]135 [07]134 [08]134 ･･････：
[09]135 [10]134 [11]134 [12]134 ･･････：
[13]134 [14]133 [15]133 [16]133 ･･････：
[17]131 [18]131 [19]130 [20]131 ･･････ Sampling A/D count(17th - 20th)
------------------------------------
Test Standards
(1) The test should be completed without trouble occurring.
(2) 5th - 20th A/D count should be within the below range.
Pressure A/D count (Indicated as ★1 in the above printout) : more than 80 count
Ending
Turn off power to the SP-4430.
6-16 Rev.F
(3) Optical System Adjustment
Preparation
95657 Check strip packing(EZ) ････････････････････････････････････････1 set
95658 REF STRIP PACKING(EZ) ･･････････････････････････････････････1 set
(Note: 95658: REF STRIP PACKING (EZ) will be discontinued.)
3)-1．Preparations
2. Software version appears followed by the main menu.
4. The adjustment menu appears, so select “7. A/D”. The below screen appears.
Optical System A/D Head Amp test screen

ＲＥＦ４０５Ｇ＝０１２５０＋
Keys used in Optical System A/D Head Amp test

・[START] ： Starts measurement（Count value will be displayed）
・[STOP] ： Cancels measurement. Initializes the related hardware and returns the
display to the Adjustment Menu.
・[MENU] ： Selects wavelength to adjust
・[-] ： Switches gains
・[ENTER] ： Determines standard value
・[0]～[9] ： Switches channels（[0]=reference）
・[MENU]+[START] ： Prints out A/D data for selected wavelength
5. Set Switches on the Light Source LED PB（SW01～SW06）to the position nearest the connector.
(Set the switch for 405nm to position 2)
(From S/N:209022 onwards, there is no SW02 for the 5 types of LED.)
Set switches to the position nearest the LED

LED side
1
2
3
4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
Connector side
6. Press [START] to display A/D counts for all CHs.
7. Press [9] twice to move the Reagent Table forward. Place a STD-W(Standard Test Strip for
Calibration of optical system) in all CHs and press [9] to move the Reagent Table to the Reagent
optical measurement position. A/D counts for all CHs are displayed.
６０５５５０５３５３
５８５５５２５４５５
※The display is updated every 5 seconds. （last 2 digits are omitted）

8. Press [STOP] to revert back to Optical System A/D Head Amp test screen.
6-17 Rev.F
3)-2．Adjustment
A）820nm
① Press [MENU] to change the wavelength to 820nm（the following screen appears）
ＲＥＦＬ＝８２０Ｇ＝００＋
② Press [START] to display A/D counts of all CHs.
③ Check if A/D count values for reference and all CHs are within the Standard value.
（As for the Standard value, refer to the table on page 23）
Count value Count value

６０５５５０５３５３
for reference for CH1～9
５８５５５２５４５５
※Count values are displayed ＲＥＦＣＨ１ＣＨ２ＣＨ３ＣＨ４

as shown the right ＣＨ５ＣＨ６ＣＨ７ＣＨ８ＣＨ９
（last 2 digits are omitted）
※The display is updated every 5 seconds. Read data 2 or 3 times – not once – before
making a decision.
④ If any count value is out of the Standard, move SW06 on the Light Source LED PB to the
connector side by one and check again.
LED side
Move SW06 to the connector side one by one
Connector side
⑤ Repeat the above ③ and ④ until all count values meet the Standard.
⑥ When all count values of CHs fall in the Standard, press [STOP] to end the operation.
6-18 Rev.F
B）610nm
ＲＥＦＬ＝６１０Ｇ＝００＋
② Press [START] to display A/D counts of all CHs.
③ Check if A/D count values for reference and all CHs are within the Standard Value.
Count value ６０５５５０５３５３ Count value

for reference fo r CH1～9
５８５５５２５４５５

making a decision.
④ If any count value is out of the Standard, move SW05 on the Light Source LEF PB to the
LED side
Move SW05 to the connector side one by one
Connector side
6-19 Rev.F
C) 575nm
ＲＥＦＬ＝５７５Ｇ＝００＋
② Press [START] to display A/D counts for all CHs.

５８５５５２５４５５

making a decision.
LED side
Move SW04 to the Connector side one by one
Connector side
6-20 Rev.F
D) 550nm
① Press [MENU] to change the wavelength to 550nm（the following screen appears）.
ＲＥＦＬ＝５５０Ｇ＝００＋

５８５５５２５４５５

as shown the right. ＣＨ５ＣＨ６ＣＨ７ＣＨ８ＣＨ９
making a decision.
LED side
Move SW03 to the connector side one by one.
Connector side
6-21 Rev.F
E) 405nm
① Press [MENU] to change the wavelength to 405nm（the following screen appears）.
ＲＥＦＬ＝４０５Ｇ＝００＋

５８５５５２５４５５
※Count values are displayed

ＲＥＦＣＨ１ＣＨ２ＣＨ３ＣＨ４
as shown the right
ＣＨ５ＣＨ６ＣＨ７ＣＨ８ＣＨ９
making a decision.
④ If any count value is out of the Standard, move SW01 and SW02 on the Light Source LED PB
to the connector side by one and check again.
(From S/N:209022 onwards, there is no SW02 for the 5 types of LED.)
LED side
Move SW01 and SW02 to the connector
side one by one

Connector side
⑥ When A/D count values of all CHs fall in the Standard, move on to ⑧.
If not, perform ⑦.
6-22 Rev.F
⑦ If all channels (R1 - 9) do not appear, loosen the screw on the Light Source Unit Fiber
Stopper 90°and turn the below indicated two Optical Fibers (one at a time) until all channels
appear on the Display. Then, coat the fiber connection with screw lock.
Also, tighten the screw on the Fiber Stopper 90°and coat with screw lock.
※ The Optical Fibers are very fragile. Do not turn them more than 180°.
※ Handle with care.
Two Fiber to adjust

Light Source Unit Fiber Stopper
Stopper installation screw
⑧ When A/D count values for all CHs fall in the Standard, press [9] twice to move the Reagent
Table forward and remove the STD-W (Standard Test Strip for Calibration of optical system).
Press [9] to move the Reagent Table to the Reagent optical measurement position. Press
[STOP] twice to end all adjustments.
■Adjustment Standard Value range
tolerance
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment tolerance
lower
lower limits mean value upper limits upper limits
limits
405nm 2200 3800 5600 7400 11400
550nm 2400 4000 5900 7800 12100
Sample for all
575nm 2400 4000 5900 7800 12000
CH
610nm 2400 3900 5800 7700 11900
820nm 2200 3800 5600 7400 11400
Reference for all
wavelengths REF 2400 4100 6100 8100 12500
and CHs
※Only first three digits (the number of last two-digit is ignored）are displayed.
※ Values should be adjusted within adjustment upper and lower limits. But if there is any
channel impossible to meet the range, it should be within tolerance limits.
(Reference) Within Adjustment upper and lower limits・・to be adjusted to gain 2～3.
Within tolerance upper and lower limits・・to be adjusted to gain 1～5.
6-23 Rev.F
3)-3．Checking
① Reattach the Upper Cover after the adjustment for all wavelengths completes.
Turn on the power with the User Mode.
② Enter the Service Mode, and select「4. adjust」＞「2.Optical」＞「2.Test」to enter A/D
measurement mode.
Ｇ＝【 AUTO 】Ｔ＝【ＷＨＩＴＥ】＋ Set the Table position
Ｇａｉｎ（０－７，８）Ｔａｂｌｅ（９） Move with [9]
③ Make sure that the gain shows AUTO. (displays G＝［AUTO］). If not, press［8］key to set
the gain AUTO.
④ Press [START] to print the measurement result of white plate. Check if A/D counts for all
wavelengths and all CHs meet the Standard range.
■Test Standard range

●AUTO gain setting value for all wavelengths・all CHs（Reference included）
Gain : 1 ～ 5
⑤ Press [STOP] to initialize the system, and then turn the power off.
6-24 Rev.F
(4) Centrifuge Adjustment
(4)-1-1 Centrifuge Position Adjustment

1. Keeping the safety cover on, temporary set the Centrifuge unit to Chassis (Figure 1)
*Note) Do NOT remove the safety cover. If it is removed, initialization of hardware may not be
performed due to displace of rotor at the time of tuning on the power.
2. Keep pressing [STOP] turn on the power. Bring the Centrifuge unit forward by following
「4.Adjust」→「1.Hard」→「5.Adjust」→「1.Pick up」on the Service Mode.
3. When the Centrifuge unit comes forward, remove the safety cover.
Set the tip in the tip holder. (Figure 3)
4. Press [START] to move the Centrifuge to the stand-by position (PI、limit switch is off), turn off the power
(Figure 2)
2 places in the rear

Sems M3×6
2 places in the front

M3 Washer ＋ Pan screw M3
×4
Fig.1. Temporary setting of Centrifuge Fig.2. Centrifuge at stand-by position
Safety Cover
Fig.3. Setting tip
6-25 Rev.F
5. Loosen the centrifuge fixing screw and move it around so that the nozzle enters the tip
approximately in the center. The centrifuge assembly should be straight in line with the chassis.
*To avoid aspiration errors when using small volumes, please check the the gap with the cuvette (±0.3mm
from center).
6. Place a cuvette in the civette holder.
7. Select [4.Adjust] -> [1.Hard] -> [5.Adjust] -> [1.Pick up] from the Menu screen of Service Mode.
8. Set a tip and cuvette and press START.
9. Then press START again to lower the nozzle.
10. Using the hyphen key, select 100 as the range and press the 8 key to raise the nozzle by 100 pulses.
11. Check that the gaps between cuvette and tip (A and B) are equal.
If it out of alignment, please start again from step 1.
12. Press the STOP key to save the settings and finish.
A
B
Same gap
6-26 Rev.F
(4)-1-2 Centrifuge Unit F/B Pulse Adjustment (Sample drawing position from centrifuge tube)
* Before this adjustment, fit the Tip Pickup Position at the center.
* To enter other values rather than pulse number at default, make sure that the time for one
round of forward/back meets the standard in Adjustment 4)-2 Forward/back Motor
Adjustment.
Requirement
・Centrifuge cup ····································································································· 1
・Tip (Blue) ············································································································ 1
Adjustment
1. Select [4.Adjust]→[1.Hard]→[5.Adjust]→[7. Centrifuge] from the Menu screen of Service Mode.

The Front Cover opens and the Centrifuge unit slides forward. Set the tip and centrifuge cup.
(it is OK with empty Centrifuge).
2. Pressing [START] returns the Centrifuge unit to inside the analyzer. The Nozzle moves to the position
of the Centrifuge tube with tip.
3. If the tip contacts the Centrifuge tube, adjust it.
4. Use [2] and [8] for the adjustment. It moves at 0.5mm/pulse.

5. Make sure that the Centrifuge tube doesn’t contact the tip. Press [ENTER] to save the setting value
and [STOP] to return to the menu of Pulse ADJ mode.
* If [2] is used to move the Centrifuge forward by one pulse, the movement looks smaller
than when [8] is used (due to back rush), however, the setting position is completed.
* At the Pulse Adjustment, if an operation turning the motor around is made, correct
positioning is not made because of back rush. Perform pulse adjustment always in one
direction.
To move the Centrifuge one pulse forward.
Good example: press [8] once.
Bad example: press [8] twice and [2] once.
* When a number of pulse is entered, reconfirm it by following the above procedure.
6-27 Rev.F
(4)-1-3 Centrifuge Unit Install Position Confirmation (Sample drawing position from centrifuge tube)
Requirements
・Tip ····················································································································· 1
・Centrifuge cup ····································································································· 1
Adjustment
1. Select [3.Test]→ [4. Sample] from the Hard Menu. (To move on to this mode directly, select [4.Adjust]
→[1.Hard]→[3. Test]→[4. Sample] from the Menu screen of Service Mode)
2. Press [9]. The Centrifuge unit slides forward to the setting position of tip.
* Do NOT use the Centrifuge without moving it forward.
3. Remove the safety cover. Put 180μL of distilled water to the centrifuge tube and set it to the
Centrifuge Rotor.
・Leave the safety cover removed so that the pin can be seen from the hole of Rotor.
Rotor
Pin (Fit the Rotor so that pin can

be seen. Otherwise the Centrifuge
unit cannot move forward and At first, set the tip with its gate facing the right.
backward ) For the second, set the tip with its gate facing
left.
Fig.1 Setting position of Rotor and Tip
4. Pressing [START] returns the Centrifuge unit and Table to the inside the analyzer. The hard test for
liquid level detection starts.
5. Make sure that the Tip doesn’t contact the Centrifuge tube when the Nozzle goes down in the liquid
level detection (If the Centrifuge tube moves, it should be regarded as a contact between Tip and
Centrifuge tube)
<Good example> <Bad example>

The tip doesn’t contact the Centrifuge Contact moves the Centrifuge tube as shown above
tube
6-28 Rev.F
6. If the Tip contacts the Centrifuge tube, perform (4)-1-2[Centrifuge unit F/B Pulse Adjustment] again and
check it.
7. Set the Tip with its gate facing right and make sure that the Tip doesn't contact with the Centrifuge tube.
Set the Tip with its gate facing left and check it in the same way.
8. After making sure that the Centrifuge tube doesn’t move (no contact between Tip and Centrifuge tube),
install the Centrifuge.
* Make sure that the tip and Centrifuge tube never contact each other in the front-back
direction. As for a contact in the right-left direction, it won't be a problem as long as the
Centrifuge tube doesn't lean when the Centrifuge tube slides right and left with Nozzle
movement.
6-29 Rev.F
(4)-2 Forward-Back Motor Adjustment

1. Remove the Upper Cover. Get the Service Mode.
2. Move on to the Centrifuge Forward-Back movement mode by selecting [4.Adjust］＞［8.CNTRFG］＞
［3.F/B］.
3. Press [START］to move the Forward-back Motor. At this time, the driving time for a round trip
(Centrifuge goes forward from its standby position and returns to the position) is displayed. When the
centrifuge returns to the standby position, an alarm sounds. Adjust the displayed time so that it meets
the following standard with VR02.
ＣＮＴＲＦＧＦ／Ｂ＋
Ｍｏｖｉｎｇ… ［８．０］
Time per stroke : 8.0±0.5 sec/stroke
(4)-3 Rotation Speed Adjustment

2. Move on to the Centrifuge Rotation speed monitor mode by selecting [4.Adjust］＞［8.CNTRFG］＞
［1.ROT(1)］
3. Press [9] to move the Centrifuge to the front.
4. Pipette 250 µL of distilled water into the Centrifuge Tube and place it in the Centrifuge.
ＣＮＴＲＦＧＣｏｎｆｉｒｍ＋
【０００】ｒｐｍ
5. Press [START] to start rotating the Centrifuge. At this time, adjust the rotation speed with VR01 to
meet the below speed.
Standard : 10,100±100 rpm
(4)-4 Positioning Pitch Adjustment

Requirements
・Cardboard 5mm×15mm
Adjustment
2. Move on to the Positioning Pitch Adjustment by selecting [4.Adjust］＞［8.CNTRFG］＞［2.ROT(2)］.
Press [9] to move the Centrifuge to the front.
4. Pour 250μＬ of distilled water into the Centrifuge tube and set it to the Centrifuge.
5. Insert the cardboard into the slit of the Safety Cover and press the limit switch.
6. Press [START］to start rotating the Centrifuge. Adjust the Rotor with VR101 so that the number of pulse
for one rotation falls within the standard.
ＣＮＴＲＦＧＲＯＴ（２）＋
Ｍｏｖｉｎｇ… [ ２５]
Standard ： 25 pulses±5pulses／rotation
6-30 Rev.F
ＶＲ０１
Rotation Adjusting Volume
ＶＲ０２
Forward-Back Speed Adjusting Volume
ＶＲ１０１
Positioning Pitch Adjusting Volume
Insert the cardboard,

press the limit switch.
6-31 Rev.F
(5) Temperature Adjustment

Requirements
・Digital thermometer
・Caramel thermistor
・Beads thermistor
・Silicon grease（G-40H）
・Sensor holding jig
・Air pack
(5)-1 Optical Block Temperature Adjustment

1. Remove the Maintenance Cover (TOP), and the fixing screw (M2) of the Optical Block Shield Cover.
2. Apply the thermistor compound at the tip of the beads thermistor thermometer sensor.
Put the tip of the sensor in the screw hole.
3. Put the maintenance Cover, and get the Service Mode.
Leave it for 120 minutes with the power on.
4. Select “4.Adjust” followed by “9.TEMP” to get the Temperature Adjustment Mode.
5. Press [-] to stop the Fan. Leave it for about 20 minutes until temperature becomes stable.
6. Adjust the temperature to the range below by VR02 at the bottom of the analyzer.
Standard: 37.25±0.15℃
7. Remove the sensor after the adjustment is completed. Wipe out the thermistor compound, and install
the fixing screw.
Remove the fixing screw of the Optical

Block Shield Cover, and put the tip of the
sensor in the screw hole.
6-32 Rev.F
6-33 Rev.F
(5)-2 Reagent Table Temperature Adjustment

1. Put all the cover, and get the Service Mode.
2. Select “4.Adjust” followed by “9.TEMP” to get the Temperature Adjustment Mode.
3. Press［9］to move the Table forward.
4. Apply the thermister compound to the caramel thermister sensor and install it to the groove of the
Table (around CH6)
5. Fix the thermister sensor to the Reagent Table with sensor fixing jig.
6. Cover the Reagent Table with the air pack not to take the influence such as wind and leave it for 120
minutes with the power on.
7. Press［－］to stop the Fan. Leave it for 20 minutes until temperature becomes stable.
8. Calculate the true value based on the oisplayed value of digital thermometer by using the conversion
table of thermister sensor jig.
9. If the temperature of the Reagent Table doesn't meet the Standard, adjust it with the temperature
control (VR03) at the bottom of the analyzer.
Standard：37.00℃±0.15℃
10.After the adjustment, remover the sensor and wipe out the thermistor compound.
Sensor attaching position Holding sensor with temp. control jig
Reagent Table covered by air pack
Bottom of analyzer
VR02
Optical Block temperature adjustment volume
VR03
Reagent Table temperature adjustment volume
6-34 Rev.F
(6) Pump Motor Slider Fixing Screw Adjustment
1. Assemble the Slider to the Pump base.

2. Fix CKD motor to the Pump base using 2 screws.
3. Align the cut surface on the Motor Output Shaft with the Slider and set the output shaft flush against the
side and bottom faces of the Slider’s Groove.
4. Tighten the screw to meet the Standard at the position where the tip of screw contacts the Motor
Output Axis.
Standard ： Angle for tightening screw 45°±5°
5. Apply some screw lock to the screw.
6. Assemble the Plunger body to the Pump base.
Fixing screw
6-35 Rev.F
Chapter 6 Adjustments SP-4430 SERVICE MANUAL
(7) Nozzle Piping Adjustment

(7-1) Pre-specification change: Lots up to S/N.41105099
Installment of Nozzle Piping・Pressure Test Piping

1. Turn off the power. Remove the Upper Cover and Maintenance Cover (TOP, SIDE). Move the Nozzle
Drive Unit to the left end.
2. Set the Nozzle Piping to the analyzer.
Component clip
True up the edges of component

clip and silicon tube.
3. Install the micro line tube at the Nozzle Relay PB.

・Tube with black line……Connect to the Nozzle Relay Printed board
・Tube without line……………Connect to the Sampling Pump
Nozzle Relay Printed
board
6-36 Rev.F
4. Put the fixing Bind tube through the space of component clip.
See Fig.A for the view See Fig.A for the view
from this direction. from this direction.
The front
Micro line tube Micro line tube
Connect the Micro line tube

and Nozzle pipe by making a
After adjustment, the direction of
space of around 1.0mm
tube goes downward.
between them.
Nozzle Pipe
Fig. B Fig. A
5. Install the Cap Piping.
Cap Piping
(Install to the left side of
Sampling Pump) Nozzle Relay Printed board
Sampling Pump
6-37 Rev.F
6. By moving the Nozzle drive unit right and left with hands, make sure that the Liner tube never goes
forward over the Nozzle chassis supporting metals. Also, check if the Liner tube is on the level.
Liner tube
See Fig. C for the view
from this direction.
Sampling Pump Nozzle chassis supporting metals
Liner tube
Check if the Liner tube is horizontally installed.
Fig. C
7. Attach the Upper Cover without catching liner tube, other pipes and wires.
8. Perform Adjustment (2) Pressure Detection Adjustment.
6-38 Rev.F
(7-2) Post-specification change: lots from S/N.41106001
Installment of Nozzle Piping・Pressure Test Piping

1. Turn off the power. Remove the Upper Cover and Maintenance Cover (TOP, SIDE). Move the Nozzle
Drive Unit to the left end.
2. Set the Nozzle Piping to the analyzer.
Tube clamp
Position the tip of the silicon tube

in line with the tip of the tube
clamp
3. Install the micro line tube at the Nozzle Relay PB.

・Tube with black line……Connect to the Nozzle Relay Printed board
・Tube without line……………Connect to the Sampling Pump
Nozzle Relay Printed
board
6-39 Rev.F
4.Put the fixing Bind tube through the space of component clip.
Thread the tube between

the raised parts.
Adjust so that the tube

is not caught in the arm.
Front of analyzer
Micro line tube

One tube may stick out from
the molded part.
1.0mm
Connect the Micro line

tube and Nozzle pipe
by making a space of
around 1.0mm between Nozzle pipe
them.
5. By moving the Nozzle drive unit right and left with hands, make sure that the Liner tube never
goes forward over the Nozzle chassis supporting metals. Also, check if the Liner tube is on the
level.
Liner tube
See Fig. A for the view

from this direction.
Nozzle chassis supporting metals
Front of analyzer
6-40 Rev.F
Check if the Liner tube Liner tube

is horizontally installed.
Fig. A
6. Attach the Upper Cover without catching liner tube, other pipes and wires.
7. Perform Adjustment (2) Pressure Detection Adjustment.
(8) Assembly position of Nozzle drive unit Adjustment
Edge of metal fastener

Measurement touches the measurement Measurement
unit chassis unit chassis. unit chassis
Front surface of unit Rear surface of unit
6-41 Rev.F
(9) Optical system calibration

(9-1)Calibrate
<Software Version 1.00 or later> (include Software Version 2.04 or later)
<Preparation>
95658 REF STRIP PACKING(EZ)････････････････････････････････････････････････1 pc
<Instruction>
1. Select the menu below.
From Service Mode >> 4.adust >> 2.Optical >> 3.Calibrate
2.The first thing you need to do is to enter reflectance RH(405), RL(405), … RH(802) and RL(802) for
the wavelengths (5 in all) of Standard Reagent Strip H (STD-W) and Standard Reagent Strip L (STD-D).
ＲＨ（４０５）＜１．０００＞＋
ＲＬ（４０５）＜０．０００＞
When all data has been entered, the Table Cover opens and instructions are displayed.
3.Set the Standard Reagent Strips L and H according to the displayed information.
Pressing [START] closed the Table Cover and starts the first measurement.
When measurement has been completed, the Table Cover opens and the next instructions are displayed.
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（１／３）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（２／３）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｗ（３／３）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（１／３＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（２／３）＋
ＳＴＤ－Ｄ（３／３）＋
displayed. Remove the Standard Reagent Strips and press [ENTER].
The Table Cover closes and the Display reverts back to the optical systems operations menu.
NOTE : Please check that the Optical system calibration is performed properly following to the procedure
in Chapter3 4.2.(4)Confirm.
6-42 Rev.F
(9-2)Calibrate2
<Software Version 2.04 or later>
<Preparation>
・100531:REF STRIP PACKING 2(EZ) ········································································ 1 pc
<Instruction>
1. Select the menu below.
From Service Mode >> 4.adust >> 2.Optical >> 4.Calibrate2
2. Enter five different wavelength reflectance value for STD-W(RH) and STD-D(RL) calibration.
They are RH(405), RL(405),…,RH(820), RL(820).
3. Place STD-W strip on Ch1 position (see photo) and perform measurement.
Next, place it on Ch2 position (shift it leftward) and perform measurement.
Likewise, perform measurement for Ch3 through Ch9. Next, similarly, perform measurement
with STD-D strip.
Note: For Ch1 through Ch6, place a calibration strip so that its end aligns with the groove on the table
(see photo below). For Ch7 through Ch9, place a calibration strip in the same way as a single-item
reagent strip.
Instrument display
Ch9 Ch8 Ch7 Ch6 Ch5 Ch4 Ch3 Ch2 Ch1
Reference strip position Instrument display
[ In the photo above, STD-W reference strip pad is located on the left side.]
NOTE : Please check that the Optical system calibration is performed properly following to the procedure
in Chapter3 4.2.(4)Confirm.
6-43 Rev.F
Appendix 1 Printing Specifications SP-4430 SERVICE MANUAL
Appendix 1 Printing Specifications

Contents
1. Hardware ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1.1. Printer ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1.2. Printer Controller --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
2. Print Setup -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2.1. Type of Character --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2.2. Printer Function On/Off ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
2.3. Number of Copies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2.4. Number of Line Feeds--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2.5. Print Density ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
3. User Mode Printing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
3.1. Measurement Results Printout --------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
(1) Normal Printout ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4
(2) Quality control measurement printout ------------------------------------------------------------- 7
(3) Survey Printout ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
3.2. Calibration Results Printout ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11
(1) Calibration Results for Single Reagent Strip Items ------------------------------------------ 11
(2) Calibration Results for Multiple Reagent Strip Items ---------------------------------------- 12
3.3. Lot Information Check Printout ------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
3.4. Parameter Printout ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
(1) Single Reagent Strip Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------------ 14
(2) Multi Reagent Strip Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
(3) Non-measurement item parameters --------------------------------------------------------------- 17
4. Service Mode Printout (CS Mode) ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18
4.1. Service Parameters Printout ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18
(1) Single Reagent Strip Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------------ 18
(2) Multi Reagent Strip Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
(3) Non-measurement item parameters --------------------------------------------------------------- 21
4.2. Setup Data Printout------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 22
4.3. Hardware Information Printout -------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
4.4. Optical System Information Printout ------------------------------------------------------------ 26
(1) Optical System Information Printout--------------------------------------------------------------- 26
(2) Optical System Check Printout --------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
4.5. Hardware Test Printout ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 30
(1) Liquid Level Printout ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
(2) Barcode Test Printout --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
4.6. Sub CPU A/D Printout -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
(1) Pressure A/D Printout --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
(2) Pressure Differential A/D Printout (In liquid level detection) ------------------------------ 32
(3) Pressure Differential A/D Printout (Sampling) -------------------------------------------------- 33
(4) Barcode A/D Printout ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
4.7. Trouble Log Printout ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36
4.8. Measurement Result Printout for Checking the Optical System Calibration ---- 38
1 Rev.F
1. Hardware
1.1. Printer
Manufacturer : Matsushita Electronic Components Co., Ltd.
Name : Thermal Line Printer (58 mm width)
Model code : EPL-1902S2A
1.2. Printer Controller

Manufacturer : Matsushita Electronic Components Co., Ltd.
Name : Controller Chip for Thermal Line Printer
Model code : EPLSAR1901
Character width : 36 digits (Standard)
2 Rev.F
2. Print Setup
2.1. Type of Character
The Printer Controller uses built-in standard fonts and double-width fonts, (both gothic). Font is
determined by the print format.
2.2. Printer Function On/Off

The analyzer can be set for measurement results not to be printed out. Users can make this s
etting from the printer options in the submenu.
This setting does not apply to other printing functions (e.g.: parameters, reprint and online printi
ng). Other types of printing are performed regardless of whether printing is enabled or disabled.
The initial setting is on.
2.3. Number of Copies

The same measurement results are printed on in the specified number of copies (1 - 10). User
s can make this setting from the printer options in the submenu.
The initial setting is 1.
2.4. Number of Line Feeds

At the end of every printout, the specified number of line feeds (0 - 9) are added. Users can
make this setting from the printer options in the submenu.
2.5. Print Density

Character density can be set to specific levels (0 - 6). Users can make this setting from the pri
nter options in the submenu.
3 Rev.F
3. User Mode Printing

For the content of user mode printouts, see the print formats.
3.1. Measurement Results Printout

Measurement results are printed out at the end of measurement. Format can be either “Normal” or
“Survey”. The Survey format printout is made when the measurement mode has been set to “Survey”.
Reprinting uses the Normal format regardless of the measurement mode setting. Also, reprinting is
done based on the settings that existed during measurement. In other words, if parameters and options
are changed after measurement and reprinting is commanded, the printout will look the same as it did at
the end of measurement. The parameter and option changes will not effect printing.
(1) Normal Printout

<Format>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Analyzer name, ROM Ver., Date and Time of measurement(*1)
Reslt XXXXXX Serial Number(CS mode only)
No.XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Measurement No. (*2), Patient name (*13)
No.XXXX(XXXXX) ID:XXXXXXXXXXXXX Measurement No. (*2), Sampl Type(*3), ID(*4)
Sample tube [XXXXXXXXXX] SampleTube Info. Printout (*5)
------------------------------------
MULTI:XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Multi Reagent Strip name, Lot No.
1XXXXXXXXXXＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX XX Measurement values
2XXXXXXXXXXＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX XX Print sequence (Channel sequence when running
3XXXXXXXXXXＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX XX measurements with Single Reagent Strips) (*6)
4XXXXXXXXXXＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX XX User coefficient on/off mark(*7), Item, Temperature(*8)
5XXXXXXXXXXＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX XX Concentration(*9), Unit, Abnormal indication(*10)
6XXXXXXXXXXＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX XX
SINGLE XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX Single Reagent Strip Lot No.(*11)
7XXXXXXXXXXＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX XX (*12)
8XXXXXXXXXXＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX XX Measurement values
------------------------------------
QC Inf. Validity< X>XXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX-XX-XX XXXX Quality Control measurement information (*14)
XXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX-XX-XX XXXX
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*1: The date of measurement is printed out in the format selected with the “Date” parameter.
*2: No zero control in measurement number. The symbol after “No” differs depending on
the type of sample tube. (cuvette:”No.”、 centrifuge tube:”No:”)
*3: The name of measurement sample type. If the name is not set, it remains blank
( ”( )” is not printed ).
*4: Nothing is printed out if there is no ID. (“ID:” is not printed out.)
*5: Line 4 is printed only when “Sample tube info. printout” is set to “ON”.
(cuvette: “Cuvette”, centrifuge tube: “Centrifuge”)
*6: Lines 6 - 12 are not printed out if measurements are not made with Multi Reagent Strips.
*7: User coefficient on/off mark
･User-specified unit or coefficient of correlation factor A ≠ 1.0 or B ≠ 0.0: “. (dot)”
･Other than those listed above: Blank
4 Rev.F
*8: Temperature: ･When temperature is 37℃: Blank

･When temperature is 30℃: “30℃”
*9: Concentrate:
･If measurements results are outside of the measurement range or if a prozone error occurs,
printing is as follows.
･When over-range: “OVER” and measurement range upper limit (zero suppression, flush right.)
･When over-range: “UNDER” and measurement range lower limit (zero suppression, flush right)
･When a prozone error: One of the following as specified in “Prozone Display Method”
1) “OVER” and measurement range upper limit (zero suppression, flush right)
2) “CAN’T MEASURE”
･When an error occurs during magnetic card calibration.
1) “CAL. ERROR L1”
2) “CAL. ERROR H1”
*10: Error mark: ･When normal :Blank
･When a high value :「▲」
･When a low value :「▼」
*11: Lines 12 - 15 are not printed out if not even one measurement is made
with a Single Reagent Strip.
*12: Single Reagent Strip lot No. is printed from right in the order of channel 7, 8
and 9.channels where measurements were not performed are left blank.
*13: Patient name printout:When “Patient name printout” is set to “ON”,
patient name is printed in the ID section.
*14: Quality control measurement information:When “QC lockout” is set to “ON”,
quality control measurement results are printed.
Quality control measurement information is printed at startup or by accessing the mode
used to check previous QC measurement information
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.21 1999-01-01 12:34
No.0012(Man )
Sample tube [Cuvette ]
------------------------------------
MULTI:PANEL-1 MD9D04
1 T-Pro ９．２ g/dl ▲
2.Alb ５．２ g/dl
3.Ca ２．１４ mmol/l ▼
4 TG ８０ mg/dl
5 UA OVER 20.2 mg/dl
6 LDH UNDER 50 IU/L
SINGLE AA9F04 CC9D19 BF9F22
7 GGT 25℃ ２５ IU/L
8 Amy CAN'T MEAS.
9.Glu １０７ mg/dl
------------------------------------
5 Rev.F
[Non-measurement item] * Applicable to “S-43 LDL-C” only.

When a non-measurement item is measured, “*” is printed in place of a print/channel
number. A message is added underneath the measurement result as shown below.
* LDL-C １１６ mg/dl ▼
( Above Result of LDL-C is a

calculated value, not measured. ) Additional message
[Polymedco specification/ USM_HUM specification/ USM_V specification(V1.45 or later)/ “Standard

value printout” (optional setting): “ON”]
The standard range is printed underneath the measurement value.
1 T-Pro ９．２ g/dl ▲

Normal Range [ 6.5- 8.0 g/dl ] T-Pro standard range (Lower limit - Upper limit)

Normal Range [ 4.2- 5.5 g/dl ] Alb standard range (Lower limit - Upper limit)
[Meas. with expired test strip] (* Included from V1.43 or later)

When “Meas. with expired test strip” is set to “ON” and measurement is performed using
a test strip that has expired within the past 3 months, the confirmation message appears
on the screen. If the user chooses to continue the measurement, “Expired test strip”
information is added to the result. This indicates that the measurement result is for reference
only as expired test strips have been used.
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.42 2006-08-14 11:07
Results 01234567
No.0001
------------------------------------
MULTI:PANEL-1 MD0A23
(Invalid Strips) Printed here when a multi reagent
1 Glu １１０ mg/dl strip is used.
2 T-Cho １８０ mg/dl
3 BUN ４２ mg/dl
4 T-Bil １．３ mg/dl
5 GOT ２３ IU/L
6 GPT ３２ IU/L
SINGLE AB3M01
7 LDH １６２ IU/L
(Invalid Strips) Printed here when a single reagent
8 Ca １４．５ mg/dl strip is used.
(Invalid Strips)
------------------------------------
6 Rev.F
(2) Quality control measurement printout

Quality control measurement print function is available from Ver2.00 or later.
The following items are printed as quality control measurement result.
- Item name
- Lot number
- Measurement value
- Quality control measurement standard range
- Measurement date
- Quality control measurement effective date
- Result (Fail/Pass)
<Format>
-------------------------------------
SP-4430 VX.XX 20XX-XX-XX XX:X
Control Result
-------------------------------------
MULTI :
XXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX Item name, Lot number, Result (Fail/Pass)
XXXX-XX-XX XXXX-XX-XX Measurement date, Expiration date
XXX XXXXXXXXXX [ XXX - XXX] Item name, Measurement value, Standard range
SINGLE:
XXXXXXXXXX [ XXX - XXX] Measurement value, Standard range
------------------------------------
* Information is printed in the following format at startup or by accessing the mode used to
check previous QC measurement information, provided “QC lockout” is set to “ON”.
------------------------------------
QC Inf. Validity< X>XXXXX Expiration date
XXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX-XX-XX XXXX Item name, Lot number, Measurement date、Measurement value
XXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX-XX-XX XXXX Item name, Lot number, Measurement date、Measurement value
------------------------------------
7 Rev.F
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V2.00 2010-06-10 12:34
Control Result
------------------------------------
MULTI :
PANEL-1 MD9D04 Fail
2010-04-01 ****-**-**
T-Pro 4.5 g/dl [ 4.0 - 5.0]
Alb 5.2 g/dl [ 4.6 - 5.8]
Ca 11.4 g/dl [10.2 - 12.2]
TG 80 mg/dl [ 65 - 85]
UA OVER [ 4.0 - 6.0]
LDH UNDER [ 100 - 150]
SINGLE:
GGT AA9F04 Pass
2010-04-01 2010-07-01
60 IU/L [ 55 - 75]
Amy CC9D19 Fail
2010-04-01 ****-**-**
90 IU/L [ 110 - 135]
Glu BF9F22 Pass
2010-04-01 2010-07-01
107 mg/dl [ 80 - 110]
------------------------------------
------------------------------------
QC Info. Validity < 3> months
PANEL-1 MD9D04 2010-04-01 Pass
GGT AA9F04 2010-04-01 Pass
Amy CC9D19 2010-04-01 Pass
Glu BF9F22 2010-04-01 Pass
------------------------------------
8 Rev.F
(3) Survey Printout

Survey printing is basically the same as normal printing, but the following information is added to the
concentration on each channel and printed out.
･Concentration prior to temperature conversion, unit conversion or correction using the coefficient
of correlation factor
･Temperature information (Temperature, Coefficient of temperature conversion)
･Unit information (Unit, Coefficient of unit conversion)
･Coefficient of correlation factor
<Format>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Analyzer name, ROM Ver., Date and Time of measurement
No.XXXX ID:XXXXXXXXXXXXX Measurement No., Sampl Type, ID
------------------------------------
MULTI:XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Multi Reagent Strip name, Lot No.
1XXXXXXXXXXＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX XX Concentration(*1)
ＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX Concentration prior to correction(*2)
Temperature conversion .. [XXXX] Temperature(*3)
Kt=XXXXXX Coefficient of temperature conversion
Unit conversion ......... [XXXX] Unit(*4) ☆
Ku=XXXXXX Coefficient of unit conversion
Correlation correction
Acor=XXXXXXX Bcor=XXXXXXX Coefficient of correlation factor
Empty line
ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX
Temperature conversion .. [XXXX]
Kt=XXXXXX Same as ☆
Unit conversion ......... [XXXX]
Ku=XXXXXX
Acor=XXXXXXX Bcor=XXXXXXX
: Repeated the number of measurement items for Multi Reagent Strips
SINGLE XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX Single Reagent Strip Lot No.

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ XXXXXX
Temperature conversion .. [XXXX]
Kt=XXXXXX Same as ☆
Unit conversion ......... [XXXX]
Ku=XXXXXX
Acor=XXXXXXX Bcor=XXXXXXX
: Repeated the number of measurement items for Single Reagent Strips

------------------------------------
9 Rev.F
<Explanation>
Elements that are the same as normal printing have been omitted here.
Only elements peculiar to survey printing are explained here.
*1: The same measurement values (Temperature, concentration, marks, etc.) as in normal pri
nting are printed out.
*2: Concentration prior to correction (temperature conversion, unit conversion or correction usi
ng the coefficient of correlation factor) is printed out.
*3: Temperature: ･When other than enzyme is the measurement item: “[----]”
･When an enzyme is the measurement item: One of the following
*4: Unit: ･When common unit is used as the unit : “[mg]”
･When SI unit is used as the unit : “[SI]”
･When user-specified unit is used as the unit : “[User]”
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
No.0012
------------------------------------
MULTI:PANEL-1 MD9D04
1 T-Pro ９．２ g/dl ▲
９．２ g/dl
Temperature conversion .. [----]
Kt= 1.000
Unit conversion ......... [mg ]
Ku= 1.000
Acor= 1.000 Bcor= 0.000

５．４ g/dl
Temperature conversion .. [----]
Kt= 1.000
Ku= 1.000
Acor= 0.923 Bcor= 0.250
:
SINGLE AA9F04
7 GGT (25) ２５ IU/L
４５ IU/L
Temperature conversion .. [25℃]
Kt= 0.550
Ku= 1.000
Acor= 1.000 Bcor= 0.000
------------------------------------
10 Rev.F
3.2. Calibration Results Printout

Calibration results are printed out at the end of calibration. Format is slightly different for Single
Reagent Strip item calibration and Multi Reagent Strip item calibration. Both are explained here
following.
(1) Calibration Results for Single Reagent Strip Items

<Format>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Analyzer name, ROM Ver., Date and Time of calibration
Results of calibration
------------------------------------
XXXXX S-XX XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX Item name, Item symbol(*1), Lot No., Expiration date(*2)
Calibrator XXXXXX Lot No. of Calibrator
Data L0 =XXXXXXX H0 =XXXXXXX Displayed value of L/H Calibrator(*3)
L(1)=XXXXXXX H(1)=XXXXXXX
L(2)=XXXXXXX H(2)=XXXXXXX Nth Measurement value of L/H Calibrator(*4、*5)
Mean L =XXXXXXX H =XXXXXXX Average value of L/H Calibrator(*6)
Acal=XXXXXXX Bcal=XXXXXXX Coefficient of calibration(*7)
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*1: Item symbol “S-XX” (XX is replaced with an item No.)
*2: Expiration data of Reagent Strip (Date is printed out in the format selected using the
“Date” parameter.)
*3: When “H” calibration mode is set, the displayed value of the L Calibrator is blank.
When “L” calibration mode is set, the displayed value of the H Calibrator is blank.
*4: When “H” calibration mode is set, the measured value of the L Calibrator is blank.
When “L” calibration mode is set, the measured value of the H Calibrator is blank.
*5: The number of measured values differs according to what is set for the calibration count (2 - 6).
*6: When “H” calibration mode is set, the average measured value of the L Calibrator is blank.
When “L” calibration mode is set, the average measured value of the H Calibrator is blank.
*7: Calibration results are printed out even when calibration errors occur. However,
if the coefficient of calibration has not been set, “*******” is printed for Acal or Bcal.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
------------------------------------
GGT S-01 AA9F04 2000-11-16
Calibrator ABCDEF
Data L0 = 65.000 H0 =500.000
L(1)= 68.250 H(1)=510.050
L(2)= 67.648 H(2)=511.123
Mean L = 68.344 H =509.840
Acal= 0.985 Bcal= -2.338
------------------------------------
11 Rev.F
(2) Calibration Results for Multiple Reagent Strip Items

<Format>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Analyzer name, ROM Ver., Date and Time of calibration
------------------------------------
XXXXXXXXXX M-XX XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX Reagent Strip name and symbol, Lot No., Expiration date
Calibrator XXXXXX Lot No. of Calibrator
XXXXX S-XX Item name, Item symbol

Data L0 =XXXXXXX H0 =XXXXXXX
L(3)=XXXXXXX H(3)=XXXXXXX Same as “Calibration Results for Single Reagent Strip Items”
Mean L =XXXXXXX H =XXXXXXX
Acal=XXXXXXX Bcal=XXXXXXX
XXXXX S-XX
Data L0 =XXXXXXX H0 =XXXXXXX
L(3)=XXXXXXX H(3)=XXXXXXX Same as “Calibration Results for Single Reagent Strip Items”
Mean L =XXXXXXX H =XXXXXXX
Acal=XXXXXXX Bcal=XXXXXXX
------------------------------------
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
------------------------------------
PANEL-1 M-04 MD9D04 2000-09-23
Calibrator ABCDEF
Glu S-22
Data L0 = 75.000 H0 =300.000
L(1)= 74.250 H(1)=298.050
L(2)= 73.650 H(2)=287.123
Mean L = 73.594 H =291.840
Acal= 1.031 Bcal= -0.871
GPT S-32
Data L0 = 30.000 H0 =450.000
L(1)= 26.250 H(1)=460.050
L(2)= 27.648 H(2)=458.123
Mean L = 27.094 H =458.590
Acal= 0.973 Bcal= 3.628
------------------------------------
12 Rev.F
3.3. Lot Information Check Printout

Lot information for all items in memory is printed out.
<Format>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Analyzer name, ROM Ver., Date and Time of printing(*1)
Conditions of all items
------------------------------------
XXXXX S-XX XXXXXX XXXX XXX n=X Single Reagent Strip item lot No. (In order of item Nos.)
XXXXX S-XX XXXXXX XXXX XXX n=X Item name, Item symbol, Lot No.
XXXXX S-XX XXXXXX XXXX XXX n=X Type of calibration calculation(*2), Calibration mode(*3)
XXXXX S-XX XXXXXX XXXX XXX n=X Calibration count(*4)
:
XXXXXXXXXX M-XX XXXXXX XXXX XXX n=X Multi Reagent Strip item lot No. (In order of Multi Reagent Strip Nos.)
XXXXXXXXXX M-XX XXXXXX XXXX XXX n=X Same as that of Single Reagent Strip items
:
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*1: The date is printed out in the format selected using the “Date” parameter.
*2: Type of calibration calculation: ･For Calibrator: “Cal.”
･For Magnetic Card: “CARD”
*3: Calibration mode: ･For Magnetic Card calibration:Blank
･For Calibrator calibration: One of the following:
1) For 2-point calibration: “L&H”
2) For L only: “L”
3) For H only: “H”
*4: Calibration count is blank for Magnetic Card calibration.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
Conditions of all items
------------------------------------
GGT S-01 AA9F04 CARD
LDH S-02 AB9D03 Cal. L&H n=2
ALP S-03 AC9F05 CARD
BUN S-06 AF9F06 CARD
Cre S-07 AG9G06 Cal. L n=4
CPK S-09 AJ9F05 CARD
TG S-16 AR9F05 CARD
:
STAT-1 M-03 MC9D05 CARD
PANEL-1 M-04 MD9D04 Cal. L&H n=2
Heart-2 M-06 MF9E03 Cal. L&H n=2
:
------------------------------------
13 Rev.F
3.4. Parameter Printout

(1) Single Reagent Strip Parameters
<Format>
------------------------------------
Parameter
------------------------------------
Calibration ............. [XXXX] Type of calibration calculation(*4)
Cal. Acal=XXXXXXX Bcal=XXXXXXX Coefficient of calibration
XXX n=X XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX Calibration mode(*5), Count, Lot No., Date(*6)
CARD Asys=XXXXXXX Bsys=XXXXXXX System coefficient
Range
Limit XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Measurement range lower / upper limit(*8)
Normal(XXXXX) XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX
(XXXXX) XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX
(XXXXX) XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Standard range 1～5 lower－upper limit(*9)
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*3: Expiration data of Reagent Strip (Date is printed out in the format selected using the “Date”
parameter.)
*5: Calibration mode is one of the following: 1) For 2-point calibration: “L&H”
*6: Lot No. and the date of calibration are printed out only after calibration has been performed.
*8: Measurement range is user-set and appears flush right with zero suppression.
*9: Reference range is flush right with zero suppression.
If no sample type name is set, the name remains blank（”( )”is not printed）.
If the number of set sample type name is less than 5, only set name is printed.
14 Rev.F
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.21 2001-02-02 17:29
Parameter
------------------------------------
GGT S-01 AA9F04 2000-11-26
Calibration ............. [CARD]
Cal. Acal= 1.000 Bcal= 0.000
L&H n=2 ABCDEF 2000-01-01
CARD Asys= 1.051 Bsys= 2.125
Acor= 1.000 Bcor= 0.000
Range
Limit 10 - 1500
Normal(Man ) 10 - 150
(Woman) 10 - 300
(Baby ) 150 - 500
------------------------------------
15 Rev.F
(2) Multi Reagent Strip Parameters

<Format>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Analyzer name, ROM Ver., Date and Time of printing
Parameter
------------------------------------
Calibration ............. [XXXX] Type of calibration calculation
Cal. XXX n=X XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX Calibration mode, Count, Lot No., Date
Empty line
XXXXX CHX S-XX Item name,CH No., Item symbol
Cal. Acal=XXXXXXX Bcal=XXXXXXX Coefficient of calibration ☆
: Repeated the number of Multi Reagent Strip items.
XXXXX CHX S-XX Same as ☆

Cal. Acal=XXXXXXX Bcal=XXXXXXX
CARD Asys=XXXXXXX Bsys=XXXXXXX
------------------------------------
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-11-10 17:29
Parameter
------------------------------------
STAT-1 M-03 MC9D05 2000-10-15
Cal. L&H n=2 ABCDEF 2000-01-01
BUN CH1 S-06

Cal. Acal= 1.000 Bcal= 0.000
CPK CH6 S-09

Cal. Acal= 1.000 Bcal= 0.000
------------------------------------
16 Rev.F
(3) Non-measurement item parameters
<Format>
-----------------------------------
SP-4430 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Analyzer name, ROM Ver., Date of printing(*1), Time of printing
Parameter
-----------------------------------
XXXXX S-XX Item name, Item symbol (*2)
Acor=XXXXXXX Bcor=XXXXXXX Coefficient of correlation correction (Y=Acor/X+Bcor)(*5)
Range
Limit XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Measurement range Lower limit - Upper limit (*3)
(XXXXX) XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Standard range 1-5 Lower limit - Upper limit (*4)
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*1: The date is printed in line with the date parameter setting.
*2: Item symbol “S-XX”: The item number is printed in the “XX” field.
*3: Measurement range: User-setting/zero suppression/flush right
*4: Standard range: Zero suppression/flush right
When no sample type is set, the name is left blank. (Brackets are not printed.)
When the number of set sample types is less than 5, information on all the set sampletypes is
printed.
*5: Not printed for “S-43 LDL-C”.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.42 2006-01-18 15:07
Parameter
------------------------------------
LDL-C S-43
Correlation correction Not printed for “S-43 LDL-C”.
Acor= 1.000 Bcor= 0.000
Range
Limit 10 - 150
Normal(Man ) 120 - 150
(Woman) 120 - 150
(Baby ) 120 - 150
------------------------------------
17 Rev.F
4. Service Mode Printout (CS Mode)

For content in service mode printouts, see the print formats.
4.1. Service Parameters Printout

(1) Single Reagent Strip Parameters
<Format>
------------------------------------
Parameter XXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
XXXXX XXXXXXXXXX Item name(Magnetic Card Data), Date of manufacture(*4)
Calibration ............. [XXXX] Type of calibration calculation(*5)
XXX n=X XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX Calibration mode(*6), Count, Lot No., Date(*7)
L0 = XXXXXXX H0 = XXXXXXX Standard device display value
L = XXXXXXX H = XXXXXXX Standard devvice measurement value
KdegL=XXXXXX KdegH=XXXXXX Coefficient for deterioration correction Ｌ,Ｈ
Acrd=XXXXXXX Bcrd=XXXXXXX Magnetic card calibration coefficient(Y＝Acrd･X＋Bcrd)(*8)
Kt(30)=XXXXX Kt(25)=XXXXX Coefficient of temperature conversion(30℃, 25℃)
Unit conversion ......... [XXXX] Unit(*10)
mg XXXXXX Ku= 1.000 d=X(X) Common unit Symbol,
SI XXXXXX Ku=XXXXXXX d=X(X) SI unit symbol Coefficient of unit conversion,
User XXXXXX Ku=XXXXXXX d=X User unit symbol Number of decimal places(*11)
Batch SI-1=[XXXX] SI-2=[XXXX] Unit batch setting( SI-1, SI-2 )(*12)
Range
LIMIT XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Measurement range (fixed value) lower / upper limit(*13)
Limit XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Measurement range (set value) lower / upper limit(*14)
(XXXXX) XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Standard range 1～5 lower－upper (*15)
Strip measure count ...... XXXXX Accumulated measurement times by test strip
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*3: Expiration data of Reagent Strip (Date is printed out in the format selected using the “Date”
parameter.)
*4: The date of manufacture of Reagent Strip(Date is printed out in the format selected using
the “Date” parameter.)
*6: Calibration mode is one of the following: 1) For 2-point calibration: “L&H”
18 Rev.F
*7: Lot No. and the date of calibration are printed out only after calibration has been performed.
*8: Magnetic card calibration coefficient obtained by Standard display value, measurement value
and Coefficient for deterioration correction. The calibration coefficient of the printed date is
printed.
*10: Unit: ･When common unit is used as the unit : “[mg]”
･When SI unit is used as the unit : “[SI]”
･When user-specified unit is used as the unit : “[User]”
*11: The coefficient of unit conversion for common units is fixed to 1.
The number of decimal places for common units and SI units is d = X(Y).
(X is a set value and Y is a fixed value.)
The number of decimal places for user units uses a set value only.
*12: The right side of SI-1= is the unit set with the unit batch setting SI-1.
The right side of SI-2= is the unit set with the unit batch setting SI-2.
*13: Measurement range (fixed value) is contained on magnetic card and appears flush right with zero
suppression.
*14: Measurement range (set value) is user-set and appears flush right with zero suppression.
*15: Reference range is flush right with zero suppression.
If no sample type name is set, the name remains blank（”( )” is not printed）.
If the setting of sample type name is less than 5, only the setting is printed.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.21 2001-02-02 17:29
Parameter Prot01
------------------------------------
GGT S-01 AA9F04 2000-11-26
GGT 1999-05-28
Cal. Acal= 1.000 Bcal= 0.000
L&H n=2 ABCDEF 2000-01-01
L0 = 64.294 H0 = 500.210
L = 61.290 H = 481.540
KdegL= 0.000 KdegH= 0.000
Acrd= 0.993 Bcrd= 0.794
Kt(30)=0.730 Kt(25)=0.550
mg IU/L Ku= 1.000 d=0(0)
SI uKat/L Ku= 0.017 d=2(2)
User IU/L Ku= 1.000 d=0
Batch SI-1=[mg ] SI-2=[SI ]
Acor= 1.000 Bcor= 0.000
Range
LIMIT 10 - 1500
Limit 10 - 1500
Normal 100 - 800
Strip measure count ...... 21

------------------------------------
19 Rev.F
(2) Multi Reagent Strip Parameters

<Format>
------------------------------------
Parameter XXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX Reagent Strip name(Magnetic Card Data), Date of manufacture
Calibration ............. [XXXX] Type of calibration calculation
Cal. XXX n=X XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX Calibration mode, Count, Lot No., Date
Empty line
XXXXX CHX S-XX Item name,CH No., Item symbol
☆
L0 = XXXXXXX H0 = XXXXXXX Standard display value
L = XXXXXXX H = XXXXXXX Standard measurement value
KdegL=XXXXXX KdegH=XXXXXX Coefficient for deterioration correction Ｌ,Ｈ
Acrd=XXXXXXX Bcrd=XXXXXXX Magnetic card calibration coefficient(Y＝Acrd･X＋Bcrd)
Repeated the number of Multi Reagent Strip items.
Strip measure count ...... XXXXX Accumulated measurement times by test strip
------------------------------------
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.21 2001-02-02 17:29
Parameter
------------------------------------
STAT-1 M-03 MC9D05 2000-10-15
STAT-1 1999-04-16
Cal. L&H n=2 ABCDEF 2000-01-01
BUN CH2 S-06

Cal. Acal= 1.000 Bcal= 0.000
L0 = 15.559 H0 = 57.255
L = 15.930 H = 59.510
KdegL= 0.000 KdegH= 0.000
Acrd= 0.957 Bcrd= 0.318
Strip measure count ...... 105

------------------------------------
20 Rev.F
(3) Non-measurement item parameters
<Format>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Analyzer name, ROM Ver., Date of printing(*1), Time of printing
Parameter XXXXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
XXXXX S-XX Item name, Lot number, Item symbol
Unit conversion ......... [XXXX] Unit (*1)
mg XXXXXX d=X(X) Common unit symbol, Number of decimal places (*2)
SI XXXXXX d=X(X) SI unit symbol, Number of decimal places (*2)
User XXXXXX d=X User unit symbol, Number of decimal places (*2)
Batch SI-1=[XXXX] SI-2=[XXXX] Unit batch setting (SI-1, SI-2) (*3)
Acor=XXXXXXX Bcor=XXXXXXX Coefficient of correlation correction (Y=Acor/X+Bcor) (*5)
Range
LIMIT XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Measurement range (fixed) Lower limit – Upper limit (*4)
Limit XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Measurement range (set) Lower limit – Upper limit
(XXXXX) XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX Standard range 1-5 Lower limit - Upper limit
Strip measure count ...... XXXXX Accumulated number of measurements by test strip type
[Explanation]
*1: Unit - Common unit : “mg”
- SI unit : “SI”
- User unit : “User”
*2: Number of decimal places for Common/SI units: “d=X(Y)” (X=set value, Y=fixed value)
Number of decimal places for User unit: “d=X” (set value only)
*3: The unit for the right side (XXXX) of “SI-1” is set by the unit batch setting (SI-1).
The unit for the right side (XXXX) of “SI-2” is set by the unit batch setting (SI-2).
Refer to Unit (*1) for unit symbols.
*4: Measurement range (fixed): Magnetic card data/zero suppression/flush right
*5: Not printed for “S-43 LDL-C”.
21 Rev.F
4.2. Setup Data Printout

<Format>
------------------------------------
Setup data XXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
Printer Printer setting
Use ...................... XXX On/Off
Depth ...................... X Print density setting
Print ..................... XX Number of copies setting
Feed ....................... X Number of line feeds setting
Communication Communication setting

Use ...................... XXX On/Off
Format ................ Type X Communication format(*2)
Baudrate .......... XXXX [bps] Communication speed
Barcode reader Barcode Reader setting

Use ...................... XXX On/Off
Starting digit ............ XX Read starting digit setting
Reading digits ............ XX Read digits setting
Local Country setting

Date format .............. XXX Date format setting(*3)
Language ............ XXXXXXXX Language setting(*4)
Miscellaneous Other settings

Tip case message .......... XX Tip Waste Case message setting
CARE LAB ................. XXX CARE LAB setting (ON/OFF)
Link ..................... XXX Online printing setting (ON/OFF)
ID Input ............. XXXXXXX ID entry mode（123+ABC/123）(*5)
Sampl tube info. PRN .... XXX Sample tube info. printout（ON/OFF）
COMM .... XXX Smple tube info output（ON/OFF）
Invalid measure .......... XXX Meas. with expired test strip (ON/OFF) (*6)
Patient name print ........ XX Patient name printout (ON/OFF)
Normal range print ........ XX Standard range printout (ON/OFF)
Reagent lot management .... XX Reagent lot management (ON/OFF)
Measurable count ........ XX Measurable count
Card Input 1Time .......... XX Single card input (ON/OFF) (*7)
QC lock out ............... XX QC lockout (ON/OFF)
-Control expir ........ XXXXX QC meas. effective interval unit (DAY/MONTH)
DAY ........ XXXXX Effective QC term (days)
MONTH ...... XXXXX Effective QC term (months)
-Control expire/lot ... XXXXX QC meas. effective/lot (ON/OFF)
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*2: Communication format: ･When format 1 is used: “Type 1”
･When format 2 is used: “Type 2”
*3: Date format setting: ･When year-month-day is set, “YMD”
･When month-day-year is set, “MDY”
･When day-month-year is set: “DMY”
22 Rev.F
*4: Display language setting: ･When English is set: “English”

･When Japanese is set: “Japanese”
･When French is set: “French”
･When German is set: “German”
･When Italian is set: “Italian”
･When Spanish is set: “Spanish”
*5: ID entry mode: ･When alphabet is entered,「123+ABC」
･When alphabet is not entered,「123 」
*6: Included from V1.43 or later
*7: Included from V2.00 or later
<Example printout>
------------------------------------ ------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.21 2001-02-02 12:34 SP-4430 V1.21 2001-02-02 12:34
Setup data Prot01 Setup data Prot01
------------------------------------ ------------------------------------
Printer Printer
Use ...................... ON Use ...................... ON
Depth ..................... 2 Depth ..................... 2
Print ..................... 1 Print ..................... 1
Feed ...................... 4 Feed ...................... 4
Communication Communication
Use ...................... OFF Use ...................... OFF
Format ................ Type 1 Format ................ Type 1
Baudrate .......... 2400 [bps] Baudrate .......... 2400 [bps]
ID Format ............... ID__ ID Format ............... ID__
Barcode reader Barcode reader

Use ...................... OFF Use ...................... OFF
Starting digit ............ 1 Starting digit ............ 1
Reading digits ............ 13 Reading digits ............ 13
Local Local
Date format .............. YMD Date format .............. YMD
Language ............. English Language ............. English
Miscellaneous Miscellaneous
Tip case message .......... 5 Tip case message .......... 5
CARE LAB.................. OFF CARE LAB.................. OFF
ID Input ............. 123+ABC ID Input ............. 123+ABC
Sampl tube info. PRN .... OFF Sampl tube info. PRN .... OFF
COMM .... OFF COMM .... OFF
Invalid measure .......... OFF Invalid measure .......... OFF
Patient name print ....... OFF Patient name print ....... ON
Normal range print ....... OFF Normal range print ....... ON
Reagent lot management ... OFF Reagent lot management ... ON
Card Input 1Time ......... OFF Measurable count ........ 25
QC lock out .............. OFF Card Input 1Time ......... ON
-Control expire/lot . ... OFF QC lock out .............. ON
------------------------------------ -Control expir ........ MONTH
DAY ........ 1
MONTH ...... 3
-Control expire/lot . ... ON
------------------------------------
23 Rev.F
4.3. Hardware Information Printout

<Format>
------------------------------------
Pulse data XXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
Tip pick up (U/D) ...... XXX Tip pickup position (Up-Down)
(L/R) ...... XXX (Left-Right)
Tip eject (U/D) ...... XXX Tip eject position (Up-Down)
(L/R) ...... XX (Left-Right)
Pressure check (U/D) ...... XXX Air leak test position (Up-Down)
(L/R) ...... XXX (Left-Right)
Sample drop (Table) ...... XXX Table drop position
CH1 sample drop(U/D) ...... XXX CH1 drop position (Up-Down)
CH9 sample drop(U/D) ...... XXX CH9 drop position (Up-Down)
(L/R) ...... XXXX (Left-Right)
Centrifuge time ........... XX(s) Centrifuge time-1
(2) ........... XX(s) Centrifuge time-2 (※2)
(3) ........... XX(s) Centrifuge time-3
Centrifuge F/B ........... XXX Centrifuge F/B Stand-by Position Adjusting value
-----------------------------------
Counter (All) ............ XXXXX System measurement cycles
(Pump) ............ XXXXX Pump Motor total cycles
(Nozle U/D) ....... XXXXX Nozzle Up-Down Drive Motor total cycles
(※3)
(Nozle L/R) ....... XXXXX Nozzle Left-Right Drive Motor total cycles
(Table) ........... XXXXX Reagent Table Motor total cycles
(CNTRFG F/B) ...... XXXXX Centrifuge Base Motor total cycles
(CNTRFG ROT) ...... XXXXX Centrifuge Rotation Motor total cycles
------------------------------------
PMC version .............. VX.XX PMC Version
SUB version .............. VX.XX Sub CPU Version
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*2: Centrifuge time cannot be set with the “5. Adjust” parameter. Setting is possible only by the “6.
Input” parameter.
As for the Centrifuge time-1, the time of centrifugation when the measurement is normal.
As for the Centrifuge time-2, the time of centrifugation only when the measurement is contain
the specific item.（For example, the specific items are LDH, etc.）
Centrifuge time 3 is the period of time for remeasurement using the built-in Centrifuge.
*3: The total number of operation cycles is not counted up in the test mode or maintenance mode.
It is only updated when measurements are made. (It is also updated in ND and NOBAR
measurements.)
24 Rev.F
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.21 2001-02-02 12:34
Pulse data Prot01
------------------------------------
Tip pick up (U/D) ...... 345
(L/R) ...... 150
Tip eject (U/D) ...... 265
(L/R) ...... 5
Pressure check (U/D) ...... 320
(L/R) ...... 700
Sample drop (Table) ...... 518
CH1 sample drop(U/D) ...... 105
CH9 sample drop(U/D) ...... 105
(L/R) ...... 1000
Centrifuge time .......... 120(s)
(2) .......... 180(s)
(3) .......... 20(s)
Centrifuge F/B ........... 0
------------------------------------
Counter (All) ............ 130
(Pump) ............ 1
(Nozle U/D) ....... 130
(Nozle L/R) ....... 130
(Table) ........... 130
(CNTRFG F/B) ...... 130
(CNTRFG ROT) ...... 10
------------------------------------
PMC version .............. V2.11
SUB version .............. V0.08
------------------------------------
25 Rev.F
4.4. Optical System Information Printout

(1) Optical System Information Printout
The optical system printout contains the reflectance off the Standard Reagent Strip used in Optical
System calibration and reflectance off White and Black Plate that is determined by the calibration.
<Format>
------------------------------------
Optical system data XXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
CH1 RH RL RW RB Channel 1
405 X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX [405nm] RH, RL, RW, RB
☆
(※2)
------------------------------------
405 X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX
575 X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX Same as ☆
------------------------------------
: Repeated the number of Channels.
------------------------------------
575 X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX Same as ☆
------------------------------------
Calibration date ..... XXXXXXXXXX Date of Optical System calibration(*3)
Optical check level ..... XXXXXXX Optical system dirt check threshold
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*2: RH :Absolute reflectance (set at calibration start) off Standard Reagent Strip H (STD-W) at
each wavelength
RL :Absolute reflectance (set at calibration start) off Standard Reagent Strip L (STD-D) at
each wavelength
RW :Reflectance (measured value) off White Plate at each wavelength
RB :Reflectance (measured value) off Black Plate at each wavelength
*3: The date is Optical System calibration in the format selected using the “Date” parameter.
26 Rev.F
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
Optical system data Prot01
------------------------------------
CH1 RH RL RW RB
405 0.9290 0.0570 0.7705 0.0048
550 0.9760 0.0500 0.4712 0.0182
575 0.9720 0.0500 0.4678 0.0146
610 0.9720 0.0500 0.4678 0.0146
820 0.9210 0.0370 0.4390 0.0007
------------------------------------
CH2 RH RL RW RB
405 0.9290 0.0570 0.7691 0.0034
550 0.9760 0.0500 0.4683 0.0170
575 0.9720 0.0500 0.4672 0.0135
610 0.9620 0.0500 0.4474 0.0146
820 0.9210 0.0370 0.4405 0.0009
------------------------------------
------------------------------------
CH9 RH RL RW RB
405 0.9290 0.0570 0.6965 0.0144
550 0.9760 0.0500 0.4155 0.0208
575 0.9720 0.0500 0.4099 0.0206
610 0.9620 0.0500 0.3969 0.0219
820 0.9210 0.0370 0.4050 0.0026
------------------------------------
Calibration date ..... 1999-11-11
Optical check level ..... 0.030
------------------------------------
27 Rev.F
(2) Optical System Check Printout

Measurement data is printed out after Optical System checks.
<Format>
------------------------------------
A/D Count & Gain (XXXXX) XXXXXX Table position during measurement(*2)、Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
CH1 Nsmp Dsmp G Nref Dref G Channel 1
405 XXXXX XXXXX X XXXXX XXXXX X [405nm] Nsmp, Dsmp, G(smp), Nref, Dref, G(ref)
☆
(*3)
------------------------------------
405 XXXXX XXXXX X XXXXX XXXXX X
575 XXXXX XXXXX X XXXXX XXXXX X Same as ☆
------------------------------------
: Repeated the number of Channels.
------------------------------------
575 XXXXX XXXXX X XXXXX XXXXX X Same as ☆
------------------------------------
G0 **************************** XX
G1 **************************** XX
G2 **************************** XX
G3 **************************** XX Distribution map of Gain (*４)
G4 **************************** XX
G5 **************************** XX
G6 **************************** XX
G7 **************************** XX
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*2: Table position during measurement ･For Reagent Strip setting position: “FRONT”
･For Reagent Strip measurement position: “STRIP”
･For White Plate measurement position: “WHITE”
･For Black Plate measurement position: “BLACK”
*3: Nsmp:Reflected A/D count (when LED lit) for specified position and gain, for all wavelengths.
Dsmp:Reflected A/D count (when LED out) for specified position and gain, for all wavelengths.
G(smp):Gain in Nsmp and Dsmp measurement for all wavelengths.
Nref:Reflected A/D count (when LED lit) for specified position and gain, for all wavelengths.
Dref:Reflected A/D count (when LED out) for specified position and gain, for all wavelengths.
G(ref):Gain in Nref and Dref measurement for all wavelengths.
28 Rev.F
*4: Show all Gains use conditions of each channel (Contain REF.), each wavelength.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
A/D Count & Gain (STRIP) Prot01
------------------------------------
CH1 Nsmp Dsmp G Nref Dref G
405 1831 3 6 13245 12 3
550 1308 -4 2 18063 7 2
575 1291 -3 1 12721 0 0
610 914 -4 1 15138 4 1
820 1352 -1 4 16687 11 3
------------------------------------
405 1844 -16 6 13194 12 3
550 1305 -6 2 18007 10 2
575 1301 -3 1 12677 0 0
610 948 -2 1 15088 6 1
820 1348 -3 4 16688 13 3
------------------------------------
------------------------------------
405 1664 -10 7 13040 17 3
550 954 -5 1 17966 11 2
575 1358 -5 1 12645 3 0
610 998 -6 1 15049 6 1
820 1589 -8 4 16685 16 3
------------------------------------
G0 0
G1 *** 3
G2 ********************** 22
G3 ******************* 19
G4 ***** 5
G5 * 1
G6 0
G7 0
------------------------------------
29 Rev.F
4.5. Hardware Test Printout

(1) Liquid Level Printout
The liquid level printout is printed out after the liquid level test. It gives the liquid level as the distance
from the Nozzle vertical origin (end of Tip).
<Format>
------------------------------------
Sample level pulse = XXX(XX.XXmm) Liquid level(*1)
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*1: Liquid level is printed out as the number of pulses from the Nozzle’s vertical origin. The
distance calculated from this number of pulses is given in ().
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
Sample level pulse = 322(28.05mm)
------------------------------------
(2) Barcode Test Printout

The barcode test print out is printed out after a barcode reading test. It contains the items, No. and
name of Multi and Single Reagent Strips obtained by reading the barcode.
<Format>
------------------------------------
Multi = [XXX] <XXXXXXXXXX>
Single(CH7) = [XXX] <XXXXX> Barcode data, Reagent Strip name(*1)
(CH8) = [XXX] <XXXXX>
(CH9) = [XXX] <XXXXX>
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*1: The barcode on the Reagent Strip is read, and the item, No., and name of the Strip are
printed out. If a Strip is not present or the barcode is misread, the Strip name will appear as
follows:
･When there is no Reagent Strip, the No. is printed as “0” and the name as “NO STRIP”.
･When a misread error occurs, the No. is printed as “255” and the name as “MIS READ”.
(If ND Paper is read, a misread error occurs.)
･If magnetic card data for the read Reagent Strip cannot be found, “NO DATA” is printed
for the name.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
Multi = [ 1] <PANEL-2 >
Single(CH7) = [ 0] <NO STRIP>
(CH8) = [255] <MIS READ>
(CH9) = [ 35] <Amy >
------------------------------------
30 Rev.F
4.6. Sub CPU A/D Printout

(1) Pressure A/D Printout
Pressure A/D is printed out after the air leak test. In the air leak test, the Sub CPU reads the
pressure A/D count every set interval, and compiles results at the end of the test.
<Format>
------------------------------------
Pressure A/D count XXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
Norm. Pressure A/D count
[01]XXX [02]XXX [03]XXX [04]XXX
[05]XXX [06]XXX [07]XXX [08]XXX
(*2)
[09]XXX [10]XXX [11]XXX [12]XXX
[13]XXX [14]XXX [15]XXX [16]XXX
[17]XXX [18]XXX [19]XXX [20]XXX
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*2: The sampling interval for the air leak test is 500 msec. Air is sampled 20 times in all.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
Pressure A/D count Prot01
------------------------------------
Norm.
[01]127 [02]127 [03]126 [04]126
[05]124 [06]124 [07]123 [08]122
[09]122 [10]121 [11]121 [12]120
[13]120 [14]119 [15]118 [16]118
[17]118 [18]117 [19]117 [20]116
------------------------------------
31 Rev.F
4.8. Measurement Result Printout for Checking the Optical System Calibration
<Format>
------------------------------------
Optical condition XXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
405 550 575 610 820 Measurement wavelength
CH1 XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX
CH5 XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX Reflectance(%) of each wavelength for channel
------------------------------------
mean XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX Average of wavelength (%)
R XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX XX.XX Gap between max.value and min.value in wavelength(%)
------------------------------------
If the measurement result of ND-7 is out of the below standard, perform the calibration
of optical system again after cleaning the optical window and white board black board.
･The average of each wavelength falls within ±3% of its testing value.
･R for 405nm falls within 1.0%, R for other wavelength, within 0.5%.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.22 2001-03-21 10:00
Optical condition 123456
------------------------------------
405 550 575 610 820
CH1 35.00 42.23 42.21 41.76 37.78
CH2 34.89 42.22 42.13 41.70 37.64
CH3 34.89 42.16 42.09 41.70 37.72
CH4 35.08 42.26 42.12 41.71 37.68
CH5 35.10 42.37 42.21 41.85 37.74
CH6 35.03 42.24 42.11 41.67 37.61
CH7 35.04 42.42 42.34 41.93 37.90
CH8 34.80 42.25 42.35 41.92 37.92
CH9 34.90 42.31 42.22 41.82 37.89
------------------------------------
mean 34.97 42.29 42.20 41.78 37.76
R 0.30 0.29 0.26 0.26 0.31
------------------------------------
38 Rev.F
(2) Pressure Differential A/D Printout (In liquid level detection)

Pressure differential A/D is printed out after liquid level detection. In liquid level detection, the Sub
CPU reads the pressure differential A/D count every set interval, and compiles results at the end of
the operation.
<Format>
------------------------------------
------------------------------------
Sample check B[XXX] L[XXX]% S[XXX] Base count, Threshold information(*2)
------------------------------------
Diff. Pressure differential A/D count
XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX
XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX (*3)
:
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*2: B (Base count) :Differential A/D count prior to pump discharge in liquid level detection.
The threshold is determined from this base count.
L (Threshold) :The threshold is indicated as a percentage of the base count.
S (Threshold count):This indicates the A/D count of the actual threshold. (S = B x L ÷ 100)
*3: Sampling in liquid level detection is done every time the Nozzle descends 1 pulse. However,
only the most recent 200 samplings are used for data printout.
･An underline will be added to the data whose count exceeds the middle point between
the base count and threshold count.
･The count actually detected liquid level (a count exceeded threshold count）is printed
in white-black reversed display.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
------------------------------------
Sample check B[116] L[ 90]% S[104]
------------------------------------
Diff.
120 120 120 120 119 120 120 120
119 118 117 117 116 116 115 114
113 112 112 112 113 113 114 114
115 116 116 117 117 117 118 119
:
:
120 119 118 120 121 120 119 117
117 117 115 111 111 109 106 102
------------------------------------
32 Rev.F
(3) Pressure Differential A/D Printout (Sampling)

Pressure differential A/D is printed out after sampling. In sampling, the Sub CPU reads the pressure
differential A/D count every set interval, and compiles results at the end of the operation. When the
sampling is retried, the previous data is also printed.
<Format>
------------------------------------
------------------------------------
Samping B[XXX] L[XXX]% S[XXX] Base count, Threshold information(※2)
L[XXX]% S[XXX]
------------------------------------
Diff. Pressure differential A/D count
: (※3)
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*2: B (Base count), L (Threshold) and S (Threshold count) have the same meaning as in liquid
level detection. However, there are two sampling thresholds: high and low.
*3: The sampling interval is 20 msec. However, only the most recent 200×3 samplings are
usedfor data printout. The first 32 samplings(48 samplings for retry)are kept out of air
sampling detection because they are unstable, therefore, even if there was data beyond the
threshold, it wouldn’t be detected.
･An underline will be added to the data whose count exceeds the middle point between
the base count and threshold count.
･The count actually detected abnormal sampling(a count exceeded the threshold
count)is printed in white-black reversed display.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.21 2001-02-02 12:34
------------------------------------
Sampling B[115] L[ 90]% S[103]
L[110]% S[126]
------------------------------------
Diff.
133 137 136 135 133 130 124 119
114 111 112 113 113 114 115 116
116 117 116 114 114 114 113 115
:
:
111 108 116 115 114 115 115 113
114 115 116 117 118 116 119 121
128 124 120 117 110 116 115 113
116 117 116 114 114 114 113 115
113 114 115 115 117 119
------------------------------------
33 Rev.F
(4) Barcode A/D Printout

Barcode A/D is printed out after setting or reading barcode gain. In barcode gain setting or reading,
the sub CPU reads the barcode A/D count every set interval, and compiles results at the end of the
operation.
<Format>
------------------------------------
Barcode A/D count XXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
------------------------------------
[G] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data for gain 1
[W]XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX White Plate A/D count
[B]XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Black Plate A/D count
------------------------------------
:
------------------------------------
[G] 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Data for gain 8
------------------------------------
Gain Gain setting information(*2)
CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Channel
[G] X X X X X X X X Set gain
[S]XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX White/Black evaluation
------------------------------------
Multi Multi Reagent Strip read information(*3)
CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Channel
[S]XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX White/Black evaluation
[D]XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX (XXXXX)[XX] Read A/D count, Data, Reagent Strip No.
------------------------------------
Single Single Reagent Strip read information(*4)
CH6 [S]XXX Channel 6, White/Black evaluation
[D]XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Read A/D count
☆
: Repeated

[BAR](XXXXXXXXXX) [XX] Read data, Item No.
: Same content as ☆ is repeated for channels 7 and 8.
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*2: Gain setting information
A/D count of the White and Black Plates read at the set gain. The white/black evaluation is
determined from the white Plate e A/D count.
*3: Multi Reagent Strip read information
A/D count for barcode of Multi Reagent Strip, bit data obtained from that count and
white/black evaluation, and the No. (read barcode data) of the Multi Reagent Strip.
34 Rev.F
*4: Single Reagent Strip read information

In reading Single Reagent Strips, the A/D count is read (88 times in all) every time the Table
is driven about 0.25 mm and printed out sequentially. In includes the A/D count, the bit data
obtained from that count and white/black evaluation, and the No. (read barcode data) of the
Single Reagent Strip.
●In the data of Gain 1, in case A/D count of white board（[W]）is small（200 or less）
or A/D count（[B]）of black board is big（100 or more）, the Barcode sensor may not
be normal. This can be considered as the timing for replacement.
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
Barcode A/D count Prot01
------------------------------------
------------------------------------
[G] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
[W]255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
[B]031 027 023 026 025 025 022 024
------------------------------------
:
------------------------------------
[G] 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
[W]005 006 004 009 007 006 008 005
[B]001 002 001 001 001 001 001 001
------------------------------------
Gain
[G] 4 3 4 4 4 3 3 4
[W]110 105 099 098 102 116 088 106
[B]024 015 011 010 013 021 022 026
[S]110 105 099 098 102 116 088 106
------------------------------------
Multi
CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
[G] 4 4 3 3 4
[S]098 102 116 088 106
[D]138 149 018 030 165 (00110)[ 6]
------------------------------------
Single
CH6 [G]4 [S]099
140 135 138 129 113 098 042 032
029 021 026 038 081 115 120 135
138 139 140 140 140 140 139 139
138 137 136 128 124 126 125 125
124 126 123 119 111 087 031 029
028 031 046 064 099 116 123 129
138 126 119 102 088 063 042 036
025 024 022 021 025 026 029 028
030 031 046 068 099 120 131 130
129 125 116 099 061 049 043 040
041 046 048 054 055 050 058 056
[BAR](1000101101) [22]
CH7 [G]3 [S]105
138 131 130 128 106 105 069 042
:
------------------------------------
35 Rev.F
4.7. Trouble Log Printout

<Format>
------------------------------------
Recent errors XXXXXX Analyzer No.
------------------------------------
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Date of occurrence(*2), Time of occurrence
XXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX No., Message, Additional information ☆
XXXXXXXXXXXX(XXXXX) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Troubled file name, Troubled line, Debug information (*3)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Debug information(*4)
------------------------------------
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX
XXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX Same as ☆
XXXXXXXXXXXX(XXXXX) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
------------------------------------
: Repeated as many times data is stored in memory (max.30)
------------------------------------
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX
XXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX Same as ☆
XXXXXXXXXXXX(XXXXX) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
------------------------------------
<Explanation>
*2: The date is occurrence in the format selected using the “Date” parameter.
*3: The trouble log lists out errors and troubles, starting with the most recent one.
A maximum of 30 entries are printed out.
*4: When the driving unit is defective, the information below is prined additionally as Debug
information from Ver2.00.
------------------------------------
20XX-XX-XX XX:XX
T05 Nozzle U/D
SEQ0.C ( XXXX)
Error=X
Sts = X, Act = X
------------------------------------
Sts： Status at the time of

Act： Action at the time of occurrence
occurrence
[0] Others - In case of [Startup in process] - In case of [Measurement in process]
[1] Closing cover operation –
[1] Startup in process [1] Mechanical initializing operation
Mechanical initializing operation
[2] Measurement in process [2] Pressure inspection operation [2] Barcode reading operation
[3] Optical system check [3] Optical system check
[4] Barcode gain setting operation [4] Centrifugation operation
[5] Tip pickup operation
[6] Liquid level detection
[7] Sampling operation
[8] Sample drop operation
[9] Reflectance measurement
[10] Discharging remnants
[11] Tip eject operation
[12]Mechanical initializing operation –
Opening cover operation
36 Rev.F
<Example printout>
------------------------------------
SP-4430 V1.00 1999-01-01 12:34
Recent errors Prot01
------------------------------------
1999-11-01 15:00
T03 Tube Pressure
SYS1.C ( 535)
------------------------------------
1999-10-30 17:21
E33 Stray Light
CLC0.C ( 2092)
CH1 610 D= 315
------------------------------------
------------------------------------
1999-08-08 10:34
T05 Nozzle U/D
SEQ0.C ( 1093)
Error=2 Pulse1= 365, Pulse2= 300
------------------------------------
37 Rev.F
Appendix2 Communication Specifications SP-4430 SERVICE MANUAL
Appendix 2 Communication Specifications

Contents
1 PROTOCOL............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 TRANSMISSION FORMAT.......................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 DATA FORMAT ........................................................................................................................................ 2
1.3 BAUD RATE ............................................................................................................................................ 2
1.4 HAND SHAKE.......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 TIME GAP ............................................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 FORCED FINISH ...................................................................................................................................... 2
2 FORMAT ................................................................................................................................................. 3
3 FORMAT OF MEASUREMENT RESULTS (FORMAT 1) ............................................................... 4
4 FORMAT OF MEASUREMENT RESULTS (FORMAT 2) ............................................................... 8
1 Rev.F
1 Protocol
1.1 Transmission format
Start-stop system (asynchronous) unidirectional transmission by serial transmission format

(in compliance with JIS X5101).
1.2 Data format
One character consists of the following 11 bits.

Start bit: 1 bit
Data bit: 7 bits (ASCII code)
Parity bit: 1 bit (even)
Stop bit: 2 bits
1.3 Baud rate
Baud rate can be selected out of the following 6 rates.

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600bps
1.4 Hand shake
Suppression by CFT and RTS are possible. (Suppression is not set by default.) XON/XOFF control is
not available.
1.5 Time gap
2-second waiting time is inserted between each block (from < ETX > or < ETB > to < STX >).
1.6 Forced finish
Data transmission is sometimes forced to stop halfway by key operation. It is not promptly stopped by
pressing a key, but transmission continues until < ETX > or < ETB > is output.
2 Rev.F
2 Format
Block structure is regular. One block consists of start, data and end. This is illustratedbelow in the
following descriptions.
Start Data End
z Start (S)
Start of each block is < STX >.

Start of block is expressed as S in the following illustrations.
z Data
Data (text) of each block is the main body of transmission contents, and is expressed by arrangement
of ASCII characters.
< CR >, < LF >, < RS > or < US > is sometimes involved in data. Characters other than these cannot
be involved.
z End (E)
End of each block is < RTX > or < ETB >.

< ETX > or < ETB > is distinguished by whether it is in the last block or not.
If it is in the last block, it is < ETX >, and if it is in the middle block, it is <ETB >.
The block end is expressed by E in the following illustrations.
3 Rev.F
3 Format of measurement results (format 1)
The measurement result (format 1) is the same as the “regular format” in SP-4410 or SP-4420.
The receiving program designed to receive the measurement results of SP-4420 (regular format) can
normally receive the measurement results (format 1) of SP-4430.
■ Transmission data of measurement results (format 1)

When transmitting the measurement results with format 1, the number of blocks differs
depending on the combination of the reagent strips.
A. When only Multi Reagent Strips are measured.
Multi Reagent Strip

Ｓ Header Ｅ
measurement results
B. When only Single Reagent Strips are measured.
Single Reagent Strip

Ｓ Header Ｅ
measurement results
C. When Multi and Single Reagent Strips are measured.
Multi Reagent Strip Single Reagent Strip

Ｓ Header ＥＳＥ
measurement results measurement results
z Format of header
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022
■ ■ ／ ■ ■ ／ ■ ■ ■ ■ ： ■ ■ CR LF
023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044
ＩＤ＃ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
Start Finish Description

Measurement date. Year (The last two digits of year), month (1~12), date (11~31).
001 008 No zero control. YMD format is always applied regardless of the date setting.
014 018 Measurement date. Time (01~23), Minute (01~59). No zero control.
I When ID is available, ID is output. When there is no ID, only the first 10 digits are output.
027 036 The measurement number is expressed in 4 digits without zero control. For the measurement
number, blank is used for 031~036.
Sample tube information (Included from V1.42 or later)
z Cuvette: ”1”
042 042 z Centrifuge tube: ”2”
It becomes blank when “Sample tube information. output” is set to “OFF”.
4 Rev.F
z Format of Multi Reagent Strip measurement results
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022
ＭＵＬＴＩ： ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF

008 017 Name of Multi Reagent Strip
023 027 Item name

Abnormal mark
z Within the range of standard values: Blank (20H)
029 029 z Low value: <US>(1FH)
z High value: <RS>(1EH)
030 034 Measurement value
036 041 Unit symbol

Temperature
z 37oC: Blank(20H)
042 042 z 30 oC: “ + ”
z 25 oC: “ * ”
z Items other than enzyme: Blank
The same repetition as 023~044.
045 154 When the number of items is less than 6, the redundancy makes up for the blank
(20H).
5 Rev.F
z Format of Single Reagent Strip measurement results
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF

When only Single Reagent Strips are measured: Blank (20H)
001 007 When Multi Reagent Strips are measured: Fixed character string “SINGLE”
Item name
023 027
Abnormal mark
z Within the range of standard values: Blank (20H)
029 029 z Low value: <US>(1FH)
z High value: <RS>(1EH)
Measurement value
030 034
Unit symbol
036 041
Temperature
z 37 oC: Blank(20H)
042 042 z 30 oC: “ + ”
z 25 oC: “ * ”
The same repetition as 023~044. No extra output is made.
The block length of this block changes according to the number of Reagent Strips
045 088 (items).
For example, if the number of the Reagent Strips are 2 (2 items), the block length
is completed as 66 bytes.
6 Rev.F
z Data errors
In the Multi Reagent Strip and Single Reagent Strip measurement results, data parts for each item (22 bytes including
end CR/LF) are output as follows when measurement errors occur.
z Error in range or Prozone (OVER)
023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF

Item name
023 027
z Over the range: Fixed character string “OVER >”
029 035 z Under the range: Fixed character string “UNDER >”
z Prozone (OVER): Fixed character string “OVER >”
z Over the range: Upper limit of measurement range
037 041 z Under the range: Lower limit of measurement range
z Prozone (OVER): Upper limit of measurement range
Temperature
z 37 oC: Blank(20H)
042 042 z 30 oC: “ + ”
z 25 oC: “ * ”
z Prozone (CANT' MEAS) or calibration error by magnetic card
023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF

Item name
023 027
Error message
z Prozone (CANT' MEAS): “CANT' MEAS ”
029 035 z Magnetic card, CAL error, L: “CAL. ERROR L1”
z Magnetic card, CAL error, H: “CAL. ERROR H1”
Temperature
z 37 oC: Blank(20H)
042 042 z 30 oC: “ + ”
z 25 oC: “＊”
7 Rev.F
4 Format of measurement results (format 2)
The measurement result (format 2) is the same as the “extended format” in SP-4410 or SP-4420.
The receiving program designed to receive the measurement results of SP-4420 (extended format)
can normally receive the measurement results of SP-4430 (format 2).
■ Transmission data of measurement results (format 2)
When transmitting the measurement results with format 2, 1 item is output as 1 block.
The order of the items are, Multi Reagent Strip, Single Reagent Strip.
Ｓ Data in Item 1 ＥＳ Data in Item 2 ＥＳ Data in Item n Ｅ

…
* The end of the block is all block <ETX>.
z Format of “data in item x”
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ／ ■ ■
020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039
■ ■ ／ ■ ■ ／ ■ ■ ■ ■ ： ■ ■ ■ ■ CR LF
040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
070 071 072 072 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089
０ CR LF

When ID is available, ID is output. When there is no ID, only the first 10 digits are
001 010 output. The measurement number is expressed in 4 digits without zero control.
For the measurement number, “ * “ is used for 005~010.
Sample number types . For ID, “1”. For number , “0”
012 012
Sample tube information (Included from V1.42 or later)
z Cuvette: ”1”
013 013 z Centrifuge tube: ”2”
It becomes blank when “Sample tube information. output” is set to “OFF”.
The maximum number of items in the measurement
014 015
The order of the maximum number of items
017 018
Measurement date. Year (The last two digits of year), month (1~12), date (1~31)
020 027 No zero control. YMD format is always applied regardless of the date setting
Measurement date, Time (0~23), Minute (0~59). No zero control
029 033
Data error.
035 035 Normal=0, Under the range=1, Over the range or prozone error (OVER)=2, Low
8 Rev.F
value=3, High value=4, Prozone error (CAN’T MEAS)=5, Calibration error by

magnetic card L1=6, Calibration
error of magnetic card H1=7
z 37 oC: “ 0 ”
z 30 oC: “ 2 ”
037 037 z 25 oC: “ 1 ”
z Items other than enzyme: “ 0 ”
Name of Multi Reagent Strip (For Single Reagent Strip, blank (20H) is used)
040 049
Item name
051 055
Measurement value.
057 061 When the data error=1, lower value, the data error=2,5,6,7, upper values are
applied
Unit symbol
063 068
9 Rev.F
Appendix 3 Error / Trouble Specifications SP-4430 SERVICE MANUAL
Appendix 3 Error / Trouble Specifications

Contents
1. OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... 3
2. DISPLAYS ........................................................................................................................................... 3
3. PRINTING ............................................................................................................................................ 3
4. LOG PRINTING ................................................................................................................................... 4
5. ERRORS .............................................................................................................................................. 5
5.1. E02 COVER OPEN............................................................................................................................... 5

5.2. E03 POWER DOWN ............................................................................................................................. 6
5.3. E04 LED UNSTABLE ........................................................................................................................... 7
5.4. E05 OPTICAL ERROR .......................................................................................................................... 8
5.5. E11 NO STRIPS .................................................................................................................................. 9
5.6. E13 WRONG STRIPS ......................................................................................................................... 10
5.7. E14 USED STRIPS ............................................................................................................................. 11
5.8. E15 NO MEAS DATA ....................................................................................................................... 12
5.9. E16 NO CAL DATA .......................................................................................................................... 13
5.10. E17 NO SAMPLE ........................................................................................................................... 14
5.11. E21 CARD MISREAD ...................................................................................................................... 15
5.12. E24 WRONG CARD........................................................................................................................ 15
5.13. E25 WRONG STRIPE ..................................................................................................................... 16
5.14. E30 ABNORMAL DATA................................................................................................................... 17
5.15. E31 WRONG DATE/TIME ................................................................................................................ 18
5.16. E32 INVALID STRIPS ...................................................................................................................... 19
5.17. E33 STRAY LIGHT ......................................................................................................................... 20
5.18. E34 BAR MISREAD ....................................................................................................................... 21
5.19. E35 BCR ERROR .......................................................................................................................... 22
5.20. E36 BATTERY ERROR ................................................................................................................... 23
5.21. E37 SAMPLING ERROR .................................................................................................................. 23
5.22. E38 TIP CASE NOT SET .................................................................................................................. 24
5.23. E39 COMMUNICATION ................................................................................................................... 25
5.24. E40 SAMPLE DROP ....................................................................................................................... 26
5.25. E41 LOT DATA INVALID ................................................................................................................. 27
5.26. E42 QC LOCK OUT ...................................................................................................................... 28
5.27. E90 MEMORY:RESULTS ................................................................................................................ 29
5.28. E91 MEMORY:HISTORY ................................................................................................................. 30
5.29. E92 MEMORY:SETUP .................................................................................................................... 31
1 Rev.F
6. TROUBLE .......................................................................................................................................... 32
6.1. T03 TUBE PRESSURE........................................................................................................................ 32

6.2. T04 TEMP CONTROL ......................................................................................................................... 33
6.3. T05 NOZZLE U/D ............................................................................................................................. 34
6.4. T06 NOLE L/R ................................................................................................................................. 35
6.5. T07 REAGENT TABLE........................................................................................................................ 36
6.6. T09 PUMP ........................................................................................................................................ 37
6.7. T12 OPTICAL GAIN ........................................................................................................................... 38
6.8. T13 CALCULATION ........................................................................................................................... 39
6.9. T14 LED INTENSITY ......................................................................................................................... 40
6.10. T17 DEVICE ERROR ...................................................................................................................... 41
6.11. T20 TIP PICKING ........................................................................................................................... 42
6.12. T21 TIP EJECTING ......................................................................................................................... 43
6.13. T25 BARCODE SENSOR ................................................................................................................. 44
6.14. T27 CENTRIFUGE .......................................................................................................................... 45
6.15. T28 CENTRIFUGE F/B ................................................................................................................... 46
6.16. T90 MEMORY:PRODUCT ................................................................................................................ 47
6.17. T91 MEMORY:MECHANISM ............................................................................................................ 48
6.18. T92 MEMORY:OPTICAL ................................................................................................................. 49
6.19. T93 MEMORY:PARAMETER ............................................................................................................ 50
7. DRIVE UNIT TROUBLE OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 51
2 Rev.F
1. Overview
When the analyzer cannot continue operating for some reason, the situation is indicated as an error or
trouble. Errors and trouble are distinguished as follows.
Error … Though checks are necessary, users can eliminate the cause.
※This includes not only analyzer problem but also misoperation by the user.
Trouble … Users cannot clear the causes, therefore if the trouble reoccurs, servicing is required.
When either an error or trouble occurs, an acoustical sound (pi-pi-pi-pi) is emitted and a message
displayed. Pressing [ENTER] proceeds to the next processing (retrying is possible with some errors and
trouble). A record of all errors and troubles is left in memory and can be printed out. However, errors and
trouble clearly due to misoperation is indicated only by a message and cannot be printed out.
2. Displays
Error and trouble displays contain a No. and brief message. Depending on the type of error or trouble,
additional information is output. When multiple errors or trouble occur simultaneously, pressing [ENTER]
switches the displays one at a time.
3. Printing
Error and trouble printouts include the date and time of occurrence, error or trouble No. and a brief
message.
In the service mode, the program source file name, line No. and additional information are printed out.
However, errors and trouble clearly due to misoperation is indicated only by a message and cannot be
printed out.
Errors that are not printed out :

Errors occurring when a magnetic card is input : E-15 No MEAS data
: E-21 Card misread
: E-24 Wrong card
: E-25 Wrong stripe
3 Rev.F
4. Log Printing
A maximum of 30 error and trouble entries are stored in memory. They are compiled into a log that can be
printed out using the trouble log printout function in the service mode. However, memory related errors and
trouble as well as errors clearly due to misoperation are not logged. Also, date and time errors at startup are
not logged. Moreover, measurement start errors (“Not Ready” is displayed and printed out) caused when
measurements are started despite the fact that trouble was detected in startup checks, are not logged.
Errors and trouble that are not logged :

Errors occurring when a magnetic card is input : E-15 No MEAS data
: E-21 Card misread
: E-24 Wrong card
: E-25 Wrong stripe
Memory related errors and trouble : E-90 Memory:results
: E-91 Memory:history
: E-92 Memory:setup
: T-90 Memory:product
: T-91 Memory:mechanism
: T-92 Memory:optical
: T-93 Memory:parameter
Date and time errors at startup : E-31 Wrong date/time
Measurement start errors and trouble : T-03 Tube pressure (Not Ready)
: T-04 Temp control (Not Ready)
: T-12 Optical gain (Not Ready)
: T-25 Barcode sensor (Not Ready)
4 Rev.F
5. Errors
5.1. E02 Cover open
Description ・This error occurs during warm-up processing (startup) and measurement.
・ At the start of warm-up processing (Startup), the Maintenance Cover is
checked. In Optical System checks, the Table Cover and Maintenance Cover
are constantly checked.
・At the start of measurement, the Maintenance Cover is checked. During
measurement, the Table Cover and Maintenance Cover are constantly
checked.
・If either the Table Cover or Maintenance Cover is not correctly shut, the
Optical System can destabilize because of penetrating light. Also, the
Maintenance Cover must be closed for safety reasons.
Cause ・The Table Cover was opened during measurement.
・The Maintenance Cover was opened during measurement.
・The Table Cover is not correctly shut (something is caught in the Cover).
・Measurement started with the Maintenance Cover open.
・The Table Cover Open/Closed Sensor is broken.
・The Maintenance Cover Open/Closed Sensor is broken.
User Action ・Correctly close the Table Cover (remove any obstructions).
・Correctly attach the Maintenance Cover.
Serviceman ・Check whether the Table Cover Open/Closed Sensor and Maintenance Cover
Action Open/Closed Sensor are broken or not. (Check Sensor status.)
Processing ・Measurement stops and a message is displayed.
・Hardware returns to its origin.
Display
Ｅ０２Ｃｏｖｅｒｏｐｅｎ
（Ｔ）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
・When there is trouble with the Table Cover:（Ｔ）

・When there is trouble with the Maintenance Cover:（Ｍ）
Printout -----------------------------------
E02 Cover open (T)
SYS0.C ( 134) (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Remarks ・Errors occurring at the start of measurement are not logged in memory.
・Errors occurring during measurement are logged in memory.
5 Rev.F
5.2. E03 Power down
Description ・Analyzer power was cut off during measurement.

・A check is made at startup.
Cause ・Power was lost during measurement.
・Power was shut off during measurement.
・The Power Cable was unplugged during measurement.
User Action none
Serviceman ・Check whether the Power Cable is short-circuited or not.
Action
Processing ・The message is displayed.
・The power-down flag is cleared.
Display
Ｅ０３Ｐｏｗｅｒｄｏｗｎ
Printout -----------------------------------
E03 Power down
-----------------------------------
Remarks ・Measurement is said to be in progress from the start of measurement or
calibration to the end of measurement.
・ The previous measurement is invalidated. (If the error occurs after
measurement result output, data is valid.)
・The message is printed out.
・An error message is displayed and is not cleared until [ENTER] is pressed.
6 Rev.F
5.3. E04 LED unstable
Description ・Light source intensity is unstable.

・A check is made only at analyzer startup.
Cause ・Weakened LED
・Electric circuit (around Sensor or A/D Conversion Device) trouble
User Action none
Serviceman ・Check the electric circuit (around Sensor or A/D Conversion Device).
Action ・Check the direct light count (check Optical System A/D Head Amp).
Display
Ｅ０４ＬＥＤｕｎｓｔａｂｌｅ
Printout -----------------------------------
E04 LED unstable
405 m= 10205 min= 9040 max= 11370 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Effected wavelengths (405, 550, 575, 610, 820 nm)
m … Mean value
min … Minimum value
max … Maximum value
Remarks ・This error evaluates the inconsistency in the Light Source LED count that is
detected in checks. The Light Source LED count comes from measuring direct
light on the White Plate 20 times for all wavelengths at Analyzer startup (Pref).
Inconsistency is calculated as (Maximum value – Minimum value)/Mean value.
The threshold is 0.05.
・ When this error occurs, Optical System gain cannot be set, therefore
measurements cannot be started. (Starting measurements will generate the
“T12 Optical gain” trouble.
7 Rev.F
5.4. E05 Optical error
Description ・A check shows Optical System status has changed since the last calibration.
・This check is performed at analyzer startup and the start of measurement.
Cause ・The White and Black Plates and/or Window Plate are dirty.
・Optical System Parts have changed (broken Fiber, aged Interference Filter,
etc.)
User Action ・Clean the White and Black Plates and Window Plate.
Serviceman ・Check the Photometry Unit (check the Optical System).
Action ・Recalibrate the Optical System.
Display
Ｅ０５Ｏｐｔｉｃａｌｅｒｒｏｒ
（９６２）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Effected channels (1 - 9)
Printout -----------------------------------
E05 Optical error (9 6 2 )
CLC0.C ( 685) (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Remarks ・Optical System status is determined by the reflectance ratio of the Black and
White Plates. When this difference is large, an error is generated. The
threshold is 0.03.
・When this error occurs at startup, Optical System gain cannot be set, therefore
8 Rev.F
5.5. E11 No strips
Description ・A Reagent Strip was not set.

・A check is made at the start of measurement.
Cause ・A Reagent Strip was not set.
・Either because of trouble in the Barcode Sensor or because the Reagent Strip
is out-of-place, the barcode was not correctly read.
・A Reagent Strip was not set in the required channel for calibration.
User Action ・Correctly set the Reagent Strip.
Serviceman ・Check the Barcode Sensor (Sub SPU A/D printout).
Action
Display
Ｅ１１Ｎｏｓｔｒｉｐｓ
（Ｍ）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Channels without Reagent Strips (Single: 7 - 9, Multi: M)

(Only displayed in calibration. Blank usually in normal measurements.)
Printout -----------------------------------
E11 No strips ( M)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Remarks ・This error can occur if a Multi Reagent Strip is not set for Multi Reagent Strip
calibration.
・In Single Reagent Strip calibration, this error can occur if the required number
of Reagent Strips are not set to the right (from CH7).
(Example: For Calibrator L and 2 calibration cycles, this error occurs if
Reagent Strips are set in channels 8 and 9. But, it doesn’t occur if the Strips
are set in channels 7 and 8.)
9 Rev.F
5.6. E13 Wrong strips
Description ・The wrong Reagent Strip was set for calibration. The Reagent Strip is not for
the currently calibrated item.
・A check is made at the start of measurement when the Reagent Strip becomes
identified.
Cause ・The wrong Reagent Strip was set for calibration.
・Calibration started for an item before it was completed for another item.
User Action ・Set Reagent Strips in the Reagent Table.
・You cannot switch to another item while calibration is in course, therefore first
go back to the main menu.
Action
Display
Ｅ１３Ｗｒｏｎｇｓｔｒｉｐｓ
（８７）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Effected channels (Single: 7 - 9, Multi: M)

Printout -----------------------------------
E13 Wrong strips ( 87 )
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Remarks ・The Reagent Strip required for measurement is decided on the first Table.
・With Single Reagent Strips, channels that do not require a Reagent Strip are
ignored. (Even if something is out there, an error is not generated.)
(Using the example in E11, if the correct Reagent Strip is placed in channels 7
and 8, and one is placed also in channel 9 by mistake, the error is not
generated.)
10 Rev.F
5.7. E14 Used strips
Description ・The Reagent Strip has been consumed.

・Reflectance (after 2-wavelength correction) of the Reagent Strip is lower than
the evaluation threshold.
identified.
Cause ・The Reagent Strip has been consumed.
・Because the Reagent Strip was either very old or poorly kept, the Reagent
Pad was stained.
・The Reagent Pad is dirty.
User Action ・Set a new Reagent Strip correctly on the Reagent Table.
Serviceman ・Check the Photometry Unit.
Action ・Check the Barcode Sensor (Sub CPU A/D printout).
Display
Ｅ１４Ｕｓｅｄｓｔｒｉｐｓ
（９）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Channels with consumed Reagent Strips (Single: 7 - 9, Multi: M)

Printout -----------------------------------
E14 Used strips (9 )
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Remarks ・Nothing in particular
11 Rev.F
5.8. E15 No MEAS data
Description ・There is no measurement information for the Reagent Strip about to be used in
measurement.
・Either a Single or a Multi Card has been input. A check is made at the start of
measurement when the Reagent Strip becomes identified.
・A Multi Card was input, but it included an item No. that was not be found in the
existing measurement information. A check is made when the Multi Card is
input.
・Before inputting a Single or Multi Card, a Special Magnetic Card for that item
was input.
Cause ・The item was measured despite there being no measurement information.
・A Single Card was not input for one of the items to be measured.
・If the error is generated in measurements with a Multi Reagent Strip, the Multi
Card of the Multi Reagent Strip to be measured was not input.
・A Multi Card was input, but it included an item that was not found in the
existing measurement information.
・A Special Magnetic Card was input, but it includes an item No. that was not
found in the existing measurement information.
User Action ・Input the Magnetic Card that matches the item.
Serviceman ・Input either a Single or Multi Card and then the Special Magnetic Card.
Action ・Check the Barcode Sensor (Sub CPU A/D printout).
Display
Ｅ１５ＮｏＭＥＡＳｄａｔａ
（７Ｍ）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Channels without measurement information (Single: 7 - 9, Multi: M)

(Not displayed when the error occurs during Magnetic Card input.)
Printout -----------------------------------
E15 No MEAS data ( 7 M)
M( 3) 7( 24) 8( ) 9( ) (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Read reagent number of barcode
（M･･･Multi, 7～9･･･Single）
Remarks ・Errors occurring during measurement are logged in memory. Printing is also
possible.
・Errors occurring at Magnetic Card input are not logged in memory. Printing is
not possible.
12 Rev.F
5.9. E16 No CAL data
Description ・There is no calibration information for the item to be calibrated.

Rev.A
・A Calibration Card that includes calibration information for the item to be
calibrated was not input.
・ A check is made at the start of measurement when the Reagent Strip
becomes identified.
Cause ・The wrong Calibration Card was input.
User Action ・Input a Calibration Card.
Serviceman ・Check the Barcode Sensor (Sub CPU A/D printout).
Action
Display
Ｅ１６ＮｏＣＡＬｄａｔａ
Channels without calibration information (Single: 7 - 9, Multi: M)

Printout -----------------------------------
E16 No CAL data ( 7 )
M( 3) 7( 24) 8( ) 9( ) (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Remarks ・Displayed only in calibration.
13 Rev.F
5.10. E17 No sample
Description ・After the Reagent Strip was identified at the start of measurement, the Nozzle
lowered to detect liquid level, but it didn’t.
・In liquid level detection, the Nozzle detected liquid level without descending to
the lowest position.
・A Cuvette was not set for calibration.
・A Cuvette was not set when measuring Hb or HDL-C.
Cause ・The Sample Tube was left in the System.
・There is no Sample or not enough.
・A Tube is loose, clogged or has a hole in it.
・Because of trouble in the Nozzle’s vertical movement, the Nozzle did not lower
to the liquid in liquid level detection.
・Trouble in the liquid level detection circuit.
・Trouble in the Cuvette Detection Sensor.
User Action ・Correctly set a sample.
・Check sample volume.
・Check Tubes.
Serviceman ・Check Nozzle vertical movement (individual unit operation).
Action ・Check the liquid level detection circuit (Sub CPU A/D printout).
・Check the Cuvette Detection Sensor (check Sensor status).
Display
Ｅ１７Ｎｏｓａｍｐｌｅ
（ＣＮＴＲＦＧ）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
When a Cuvette is used in liquid level detection: Cuvette

When the Centrifuge is used; CNTRFG
Printout -----------------------------------
E17 No sample (CNTRFG )
Nozzle U/D pulse = 100 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Nozzle U/D pulse ... Number of pulses in Nozzle descent
Calibration ............ .A Cuvette was not set for calibration.
Can’t centrifuge ..... A Cuvette was not set when measuring
Hb or HDL-C.
Remarks ・If a Cuvette is not set for calibration, the error is generated even if the
Centrifuge is set. (Always use a Cuvette for calibration.)
・In normal measurements, the Cuvette has priority over the Sample Tubes, if
the Cuvette does not have sufficient sample volume, this error is generated
even when there is sample in the Centrifuge.
・In the Centrifuge, liquid level is checked after centrifuging.
・The Centrifuge has no sensor for detecting samples. Therefore, even if either
of a Cuvette and Centrifuge Tube has not been placed in the Centrifuge, the
sample is not detected until liquid level detection at the end of centrifuging.
・If a Cuvette is not set when measuring Hb or HDL-C, the error is generated
even if the Centrifuge is set.
14 Rev.F
5.11. E21 Card misread
Description ・The check sum did not match in magnetic card reading.
・When inputting the Magnetic Card, it got caught and could not be input
smoothly. Or, the Magnetic Card has slipped from the Guide.
Cause ・Trouble in the Magnetic Card.
・Trouble with the Magnetic Card Reader.
・The Magnetic Card got caught when inputting it.
・The Magnetic Card Reader Head is dirty.
User Action ・Try inputting the Magnetic Card again.
Serviceman ・Check the Magnetic Card Reader.
Action
Display
Ｅ２１Ｃａｒｄｍｉｓｒｅａｄ
Printout ・Printing is not possible.

Remarks ・Not logged in memory.
5.12. E24 Wrong card
Description ・A different model of Card has been input.

・A Calibration Card was input on a screen for reading Single or Multi Cards. Or,
vice-versa.
・In the 2nd stripe and beyond, a different Card than in the 1st stripe was input.
Cause ・Wrong Magnetic Card
・Trouble in the Magnetic Card
User Action ・Read the correct Card.
Serviceman ・Input another stripe.
Action
Display
Ｅ２４Ｗｒｏｎｇｃａｒｄ

・This error occurs when a new Single or Multi Card is input in an instrument
with ROM Ver. 1.43 or earlier.
・This error also occurs when the magnetic card for a different specification
device is input. (The card has a number indicating a different specification.)
15 Rev.F
5.13. E25 Wrong stripe
Description ・A stripe that already exists was input.

Cause ・The same stripe was input.
・Trouble in the Magnetic Card
User Action ・Input another stripe.
Serviceman ・Input another stripe.
Action
Display
Ｅ２５Ｗｒｏｎｇｓｔｒｉｐｅ

16 Rev.F
5.14. E30 Abnormal data
Description ・In calibration, the difference between the Calibrator’s measured value and
displayed value is too great.
・In calibration, the inconsistency in Calibrator measured value is too great.
・In calibration, no difference was found between Calibrator L and H measured
values.
・A check is made after all calibrations have ended.
・A prozone error occurred in Calibrator measurement.
Cause ・In calibration, Calibrators L and H may be backwards.
・The Calibrator is poorly conditioned.
User Action ・Nothing in particular. Retry calibration.
Serviceman ・Nothing in particular.
Action
Display
Ｅ３０Ａｂｎｏｒｍａｌｄａｔａ
（Ｌ１３）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Types of errors:
・PR: Prozone error
・L1: Large difference between measured and displayed values of Calibrator L
・H1: Large difference between measured and displayed values of Calibrator H
・L2: Large inconsistency in measured values of Calibrator L
・H2: Large inconsistency in measured values of Calibrator H
・LH: No difference between measured values of Calibrators L and H
Effected channels (1 - 6)
(Only displayed in Multi Reagent Strip calibration. Blank in Single Reagent
Strip
calibration.)
Printout -----------------------------------
E30 Abnormal data (L1 3 )
CH3, i = 31 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
CH … No. of effected channel
i … No. of effected item
Remarks ・The coefficient of calibration (Acal or Bcal) does not change (The same was as
the last time was used).
・When other than a prozone error, calibration results can be printed out even if
an error occurs. However, [*******] is printed out for Acal and Bcal values.
17 Rev.F
5.15. E31 Wrong date/time
Description ・The clock was not properly set.

・The date of manufacture of the Reagent Strip to be used in measurement is
newer than the date on the clock.
・ A check is made after the Reagent Strip is identified at the start of
measurement
Cause ・The clock was not properly set.
・The analyzer was without power for a long period of time (dead battery).
・Trouble in the clock device.
User Action ・Set the date and time again.
Serviceman ・Check the date of manufacture.
Action
Display
Ｅ３１Ｗｒｏｎｇｄａｔｅ／ｔｉｍｅ
Printout -----------------------------------
E31 Wrong date/time
-----------------------------------
Remarks ・Errors (trouble) at startup that are due to the clock not being properly set are
not logged in memory.
18 Rev.F
5.16. E32 Invalid strips
Description ・The Reagent Strip is beyond its expiration date.

・The date of manufacture of the Reagent Strip to be used in measurement is
more than 2 years older than the date on the clock.
identified.
Cause ・The Reagent Strip is beyond its expiration date.
・The clock was not properly set.
・Because the Analyzer was without power for a long period of time, the clock’s
date is not correct.
・When using a new lot of Reagent Strips, a Magnetic Card was not input.
User Action ・Set the clock.
・Use a new Reagent Strip.
・Input a new Magnetic Card.
Serviceman ・Check the date of manufacture.
Action
Display
Ｅ３２Ｉｎｖａｌｉｄｓｔｒｉｐｓ
Channels with expired Reagent Strips (Single: 7 - 9, Multi: M)

Printout -----------------------------------
E32 Invalid strips ( 7 )
M( 3) 7( 24) 8( 21 9( 7) (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Remarks ・Nothing in particular.
19 Rev.F
5.17. E33 Stray light
Description ・Strong outside light was detected.

・Checks are made regularly during measurements.
Cause ・The Table Cover is slightly open and light penetrated from there.
・Electric circuit (around Sensor or A/D Conversion Device) trouble (Electrical
offset is too high.).
・The dark count Dsmp exceeded the threshold.
User Action ・Securely shut the Table Cover and Maintenance Cover.
・Change the direction in which the analyzer faces.
Serviceman ・Check the Photometry Unit (check the Optical System).
Action
Display
Ｅ３３Ｓｔｒａｙｌｉｇｈｔ
Printout -----------------------------------
E33 Stray light
CH1 610 D= 540 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
CH ... No. of effected channel
D … Dark count
Remarks ・The threshold is 300.
・When this error occurs at startup, Optical System gain cannot be set, therefore
20 Rev.F
5.18. E34 BAR misread
Description ・The Bar Code Reader failed reading the barcode of a Single Reagent Strip.
・A completely white (no barcode) Multi Reagent Strip was set.
Cause ・Trouble in the barcode sensor.
・The Table is dirty.
・Because the Reagent Strip is out-of-place, the barcode was not correctly read.
・A Single Reagent Strip is arching. It covered the Receptor of the Barcode
Sensor, so the barcode could not be read correctly.
・Foreign matter has adhered to a Single Reagent Strip.
・A Multi Reagent Strip without a barcode was set and normal measurements
conducted.
User Action ・Clean the Table.
・Check whether foreign matter is adhering to the Single Reagent Strip or not.
・Correctly set the Single or Multi Reagent Strip.
・Check if the Single Reagent Strip is arching and set one that doesn’t arch.
Action
Display
Ｅ３４ＢＡＲｍｉｓｒｅａｄ
（９８７）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Channels with misread barcodes (Single: 7 - 9, Multi: M)

Printout -----------------------------------
E34 BAR misread (987 )
CH7 = 1 CH8 = 2 CH9 = 3 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Read error code (0 if using Multi Reagent Strip)
（0: No error
1: Start bit 1 (Black) not detected
2: Start bit 0 (White) not detected
3: Parity trouble）
Remarks ・Nothing in particular
21 Rev.F
5.19. E35 BCR error
Description ・A communication error (Overrun error, Parity error or Framing error) occurred
when reading with the Hand-held Bar Code Reader.
Cause ・The Hand-held Bar Code Reader is improperly set (transmission speed, etc.).
・The Hand-held Bar Code Reader is not properly connected.
・The Hand-held Bar Code Reader is broken.
User Action ・Check settings (transmission speed, etc.) for the Hand-held Bar Code Reader.
・Correctly connect the Hand-held Bar Code Reader.
Serviceman ・Check the Hand-held Bar Code Reader.
Action
Display
Ｅ３５ＢＣＲｅｒｒｏｒ
Printout -----------------------------------
E35 BCR error
BCR0.C ( 213) (Service mode only)
Error status = 1 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Communication error code:
（1: Parity error
2: Framing error
4: Overrun error ）
22 Rev.F
5.20. E36 Battery error
Description ・Battery voltage is low.

・Battery voltage is checked in measurement standby and during measurements.
Check is also made regularly during measurements.
・The error is detected if trouble continues for 1 minute.
Cause ・Dead battery.
・Battery trouble.
User Action ・Recharge the battery.
Serviceman ・Check the battery for trouble.
Action
Display
Ｅ３６Ｂａｔｔｅｒｙｅｒｒｏｒ
Printout -----------------------------------
E36 Battery error
-----------------------------------
5.21. E37 Sampling error
Description ・This error is generated when something other than sample is sampled.
・Check is made only in sampling.
Cause ・Air bubbles, fibrin or other matter was drawn in during sampling.
・Sample volume is too low to sample.
・Trouble in the pressure detection circuit.
User Action ・Check sample volume.
・Remove air bubbles, fibrin and other matter.
Serviceman ・Check the pressure detection circuit (Sub CPU A/D print).
Action
Display Ｅ３７Ｓａｍｐｌｉｎｇｅｒｒｏｒ
（ＣＮＴＲＦＧ）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
When the sample tube for sampling is cuvette：Cuvette
Centrifuge tube：CNTRFG
Printout -----------------------------------
E37 Sampling error (CNTRFG )
SYS1.C ( 1884) 115 >> 126 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
same as the display
pressure differential value at abnormal
（Count value before sampling >>Count value when abnormal is detected）
23 Rev.F
5.22. E38 Tip case not set
Description ・This error is generated when the Tip Waste Case has not been installed for
measurements.
・A check is made at the start of measurement.
Cause ・The Tip Waste Case was not installed.
・The Tip Waste Case was not correctly installed.
・Trouble in the Tip Waste Case Detection Sensor.
User Action ・Correctly install the Tip Waste Case.
Serviceman ・Check the Tip Waste Case Detection Sensor (check Sensor status).
Action
Display
Ｅ３８Ｔｉｐｃａｓｅｎｏｔｓｅｔ
Printout -----------------------------------
E38 Tip case not set
-----------------------------------
24 Rev.F
5.23. E39 Communication
Description ・A communication error (overrun error, parity error or framing error) occurred.
・A communication timeout occurred.
Cause ・Communication settings are not correct.
・The Cable is not connected.
・Cable trouble.
・Settings in the connected Device are incorrect.
User Action ・Correct communication settings.
・Reconnect the cable.
・Remake settings in the PC, etc.
Serviceman ・Check if the Cable is disconnected.
Action ・Check the cable for an open circuit.
Processing ・If data was being output, output is stopped.
・The message is displayed.
Display
Ｅ３９Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
Printout -----------------------------------
E39 Communication
AUX0.C ( 156) Send Begin (Service mode only)
Error status = 1 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Error status … Communication error code:

（1: Parity error
2: Framing error
4: Overrun error
8: Timeout ）
Send Begin … After sending ENQ or DC1/2, a timeout or NAK was
received 3 times.
Send Block … After sending 1 block of data, a timeout or NAK was
received 3 times.
Receive Block … A reception timeout occurred.
Remarks ・ A communication timeout occurs in measurement result output if
communication is not enabled for 10 sec (CTS remains off).
・Transmission timeout:
After sending ENQ or a block of data, an ACK or NAK reply was not
received for 2 sec.
・Reception timeout:
When ENQ or a block of data is received and ACK is sent, but the next
code is not received within 30 sec thereof.
25 Rev.F
5.24. E40 Sample drop
Description ・The sample was not correctly dropped to the reagent.

・When the gap between reflectance at the beginning of measurement and
reflectance at the end of measurement is almost none, it may be judged as an
error because of abnormal dropping.
・Abnormal dropping would be found when the reflectance fall in the below
formula.
ＰE／Ｐ0＞0.99 [ＰE= Reflectance at the end of measurement]
[Ｐ0= Reflectance at the beginning of measurement]
Cause ・The sample was not correctly dropped to the reagent because the sample
adhered to around of the dropping hole.
・Because discharged sample accumulates around the tip the sample didn’t
reach the reagent.
・The sample was not correctly dropped to the reagent because the sample
amount was not enough due to clog of fibrin.
・The sample was not correctly dropped to the reagent because the dropping
position was not right due to abnormal movement in the Nozzle Driving Unit (Up-
Down・Right-left）.
・The sample with very low value (e.g distilled water）was measured.
User Action ・Check if there is nothing wrong with the tip.
・Check if there is nothing wrong with the sample.
・Check if the dropping hole is clean, and wipe off with cotton swab if necessary.
・Confirm the color of reagent.
・Measure it again.
Serviceman ・Confirm the dropping position of the Nozzle, and readjust it if necessary.
Action ・Check the movement of the Nozzle driving unit (dropping movement of hard
test）
Processing ・After checking of measurement result the message appears.
Display
Ｅ４０Ｓａｍｐｌｅｄｒｏｐ
（７４１）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Possible channel numbers with abnormal dropping
Printout -----------------------------------
E40 Sample drop ( 7 4 1)
-----------------------------------
the same as display
Remarks ・E40 Error message is added from V1.15 of ROM.
・ Measurement result can be output. The value of channel number with
possible abnormal dropping is displayed in UNDER.
26 Rev.F
5.25. E41 Lot data Invalid
Description ・The number of possible magnetic card readings has reached zero. The initial
number of possible magnetic card readings is 25 and this drops by 1 for each
measurement. Since each reagent box contains 25 test strips, the number of
possible readings reaches zero after 25 measurements are performed.
・This error occurs with USM_HUM specifications and with other specifications
only when the reagent lot management function is turned ON. It occurs if you
try to perform measurement when the possible number of magnetic card
reading has reached zero.
Cause ・Performing measurement without swiping a magnetic card even after opening
a new test strip box.
User Action ・Input the magnetic card again.
Serviceman ・Input the magnetic card again.
Action
・Mechanical units return to their original position.
Display
Ｅ４１ＬｏｔｄａｔａＩｎｖａｌｉｄ
Channel in which expired test strip is placed. (Single 7-9, Multi M)

Printout -----------------------------------
E41 Lot data Invalid ( 7 M)
SYS1.C ( 3282) （Service Mode Only）
M( 3) 7( 24) 8( 21 9( 7) （Service Mode Only）
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Test strip number after barcode scanning
（M･･･Multi, 7~9･･･Single）
Remarks ・ This error occurs with the USM_HUM specifications and with other
specifications only when the reagent lot management function is ON.
27 Rev.F
5.26. E42 QC Lock Out
Description ・ Control measurement has not been performed within the specified time
interval.
・Control measurement results do not fall within the acceptable range.
This error occurs if a measurement is performed under the conditions above.
Cause ・Control measurement has not been complete.
User Action ・Perform control measurement.
Serviceman ・Perform control measurement.
Action
Processing ・Message appears after measurement results are output.
Display
Ｅ４２ＱＣＬｏｃｋＯｕｔ
Printout -----------------------------------
E42 QC Lock Out
SYS1.C ( 2235) (in service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Remarks ・This error code was added to ROM Ver. 2.00 or later. It occurs only when the
QC lockout function is turned ON.
28 Rev.F
5.27. E90 Memory:results
Description ・There is trouble in the memory that stores measurement results. Measurement
results cannot be written or erased. Check sum error in read data.
・If an error occurs with only 1 data set, that data is ignored.
・ A check is made at power on and whenever memory operations are
performed, such as to write or erase measurement results.
Cause ・There is trouble in the memory that stores measurement results.
・Power was turned off while writing or erasing data in memory.
・Memory board trouble.
User Action ・Nothing in particular(If this error occurs frequently, contact the manufacturer.).
Serviceman ・Check and replace the memory board.
Action
・If an error (write error) occurs with only 1 data set, that data is invalidated.
・If an error (erase error) occurs with an entire block, the entire block is erased.
Display
Ｅ９０Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ：ｒｅｓｕｌｔｓ
Printout -----------------------------------
E90 Memory:results
MEM3.C ( 523) (Service mode only)
Block = 1 Error = Erase error (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Block: No. of memory block where trouble occurred (0 or 1)
Error: Erase error … Erase error
Write error … Write error
Read error … Check sum error
Remarks ・Because the trouble is in the memory, the error is not logged in memory.
29 Rev.F
5.28. E91 Memory:history
Description ・There is trouble in the memory that logs trouble. The trouble log cannot be
written in or erased. Check sum error in read data.
・If an error occurs with only 1 data set, that data is ignored.
performed, such as to write or erase the trouble log.
Cause ・There is trouble in the memory that logs trouble.
User Action ・Nothing in particular(If this error occurs frequently, contact the manufacturer.).
Action
・If an error (write error) occurs with only 1 data set, that data is invalidated.
・If an error (erase error) occurs with an entire block, the entire block is erased.
Display
Ｅ９１Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ：ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
Printout -----------------------------------
E91 Memory:history
-----------------------------------
30 Rev.F
5.29. E92 Memory:setup
Description ・There is trouble in the memory that stores user settings (options, etc.). User
settings cannot be written or erased. Check sum error in read data.
・All user settings are initialized or returned to previous settings.
performed, such as to write or erase user settings.
Cause ・There is trouble in the memory that stores user settings.
User Action ・ If this error occurs frequently, contact the manufacturer.
・User settings are initialized or returned to previous settings, therefore remake
(enter) settings.
Action
・All user settings are initialized or returned to previous settings.
Display
Ｅ９２Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ：ｓｅｔｕｐ
Printout -----------------------------------
E92 Memory:setup
-----------------------------------
Data none …Setting data does not exist.
31 Rev.F
6. Trouble
6.1. T03 Tube pressure
Description ・Tube pressure is abnormal.
・During the air leak test at power on, when the Nozzle is pressed against the
Rubber Pad and the Pump began pumping, pressure was not above the set
level (64). Or, 10 sec after pump discharge, pressure fluctuation exceeded the
set level (32).
・If measurement is started regardless of the trouble detected in power-on
checks, this trouble will also occur at the start of measurements and disable
measurement.
Cause ・The Tube between the Nozzle and the Pump came off.
・The Tube between the Pump and Pressure Detection Sensor came off.
・The Pump has aged and air is leaking.
・The Rubber Pad is dirty or deformed, so pressure does not rise.
・A Tube or Pipe is clogged.
・The pressure detection circuit is damaged.
User Action ・Clean the Rubber Pad. ・Check the Tube.
・If the trouble reoccurs, contact the manufacturer.
Serviceman ・Check whether the Tube between the Nozzle and the Pump came off or not.
Action ・Check whether the Tube between the Pump and Pressure Detection Sensor
came off or not.
・Check whether the Pump has aged or not.
・Replace the Tube and/or Pump. ・Replace the Rubber Pad.
・Check the pressure detection circuit (Sub CPU A/D printout).
Display
Ｔ０３Ｔｕｂｅｐｒｅｓｓｕｒｅ
ＮｏｔＲｅａｄｙＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
At the start of measurement, “Not Ready” is printed out. Otherwise,

the area is left blank.
Printout -----------------------------------
T03 Tube pressure Not Ready Same as display
Error=0 Press1= 51 Press2= 50 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Error: Error code (0: Abnormal pressure at check start
1: Abnormal pressure differential at check start and end)
Press1: Pressure count at check start
Press2: Pressure count at check end
Remarks ・Trouble (Not Ready) that occurs at the start of measurement is not logged in
memory.
・If trouble occurs at power on, measurements cannot be started, therefore
maintenance must be performed and the system rebooted. (However,
measurement is possible in the service mode.)
・If Tip waste trouble (T21) occurs in power-on checks, the Tube pressure check
is not performed, therefore reboot the system.
32 Rev.F
6.2. T04 Temp control
Description ・After turning on the power, temperature control did not complete within 30 min
of hardware origin return completing.
・ Trouble occurred in temperature control during normal measurements or
calibration.
checks, this trouble will occur at the start of measurements and disable
measurement.
Cause ・The Fan stopped allowing temperature inside the analyzer to rise too high.
・Damage in the temperature control circuit.
・Because room temperature is outside than the specified temperature range
(10 - 30 ), internal temperature cannot be controlled.
・The Heater and Sensor are disconnected.
User Action ・Check room temperature.
・Check whether the Fan is turning or not.
Serviceman ・Check the temperature control circuit.
Action ・Check whether the Heater and Sensor are disconnected or not.
・If the Heater or Sensor is broken, replace it.
Display
Ｔ０４Ｔｅｍｐｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ
ＮｏｔＲｅａｄｙＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）

Printout -----------------------------------
T04 Temp control Not Ready
-----------------------------------
Same as display
memory.
・If trouble occurs at power on, measurements cannot be started, therefore the
system rebooted. (However, measurement is possible in the service mode.)
・After turning on the power, if the analyzer is started up without controlling
temperature first, the temperature control check is not performed. However,
this check is made during measurements.
33 Rev.F
6.3. T05 Nozzle U/D
Description ・When moving the Nozzle vertically to the Origin Sensor position, the following
trouble occurred.
・Sensor detection fails after the Nozzle moved the specified pulses.
・The number of pulses marking Nozzle vertical movement did not fall within
the –10 to +30 range specified for the set number of pulses.
・When the Nozzle moved out of the Sensor origin position, the Origin Sensor
did not turn off despite the Nozzle moving the specified number of pulses.
Cause ・When lowering, the Nozzle hit something and destabilized. Then, when rising,
the number of pulses wasn’t right.
・In rising, too, the Nozzle got caught on something and destabilized, so the
number of pulses wasn’t right.
・The Shipping Retainer is attached.
・The Motor and Sensor are disconnected.
・The Nozzle’s Vertical Origin Sensor is broken.
User Action ・Reactive power.
・Check if anything is obstructing the Nozzle.
・Check whether the Shipping Retainer is attached or not.
Serviceman ・Check the Nozzle U/D Drive System.
Action ・Check if the Motor and Sensor is connected.
・Check whether the Sensor is broken or not.
Display
Ｔ０５ＮｏｚｚｌｅＵ／Ｄ
Printout -----------------------------------
T05 Nozzle U/D
SEQ0.C ( 1094) (Service mode only)
Error=2 Pulse1= 365 Pulse2= 300 (Service mode only)
Sts = 2, Act = 5
-----------------------------------
Error … Error code
( 0: Sensor was not detected.
1: Sensor disconnection was impossible.
2: Abnormal pulse count. )
Pulse1 … Drive pulse count (Printed out only with error code 2)
Pulse2 … Set pulse count (Printed out only with error code 2)
Sts･･････Status at time of occurrence ※Refer to Chapter7.
Act･･････Action at time of occurrence ※Refer to Chapter7.
Remarks ・If trouble occurs in hardware origin return after power on, startup checks can
no longer continue, therefore Nozzle origin return is repeated.
・When the Sensor is doused, detection is on (detected).
34 Rev.F
6.4. T06 Nole L/R
Description ・When moving the Nozzle left-right to the Origin Sensor position, the following
trouble occurred.
・Sensor detection fails after the Nozzle moved the specified pulses.
・The number of pulses marking Nozzle left-right movement did not fall within
・When the Nozzle moved out of the Origin Sensor position, the Origin Sensor
did not turn off despite the Nozzle moving the specified number of pulses.
Cause ・The Nozzle hit something in the left-right drive route, destabilizing the motor.
Then, when returning, the number of pulses wasn’t right.
・The Nozzle’s Left-Right Origin Sensor is broken.
User Action ・Reactive power.
・Check if anything is obstructing the Nozzle.
・Check whether the Shipping Retainer is attached or not.
Serviceman ・Check the Nozzle L/R Drive System.
Action ・Check if the Motor and Sensor is connected.
Display
Ｔ０６ＮｏｚｚｌｅＬ／Ｒ
Printout -----------------------------------
T06 Nozzle L/R
Error=1 (Service mode only)
Sts = 2, Act = 5
-----------------------------------
no longer continue, therefore Nozzle origin return is repeated.
35 Rev.F
6.5. T07 Reagent table
Description ・When moving the Reagent Table to the Origin Sensor position, the following
trouble occurred.
・Sensor detection failed after the Reagent Table moved the specified pulses.
・The number of pulses marking Reagent Table movement did not fall within
・When the Reagent Table moved out of the Origin Sensor position, the Origin
Sensor did not turn off despite the Reagent Table moving the specified
number of pulses.
Cause ・A Reagent Strip is stuck in the gap with the Reagent Table, so the Table can’t
move.
・Something is obstructing the Table Cover in front, so the Reagent Table can’t
move.
・The Reagent Table Origin Sensor is broken.
User Action ・Reactivate power.
・Check if anything is obstructing the Reagent Table in front.
・Check whether the Shipping Retainer has been removed or not.
Serviceman ・Check the Table Drive Hardware and Table Cover Opening/Closing Hardware.
Action ・Check whether the Motor and Sensor are disconnected or not.
Display
Ｔ０７Ｒｅａｇｅｎｔｔａｂｌｅ
Printout -----------------------------------
T07 Reagent table
Error=2 Pulse1=2200 Pulse2=5250 (Service mode only)
Sts = 2, Act = 5
-----------------------------------
no longer continue, therefore Table origin return is repeated.
・In moving from the Reagent Strip set position (Cover is open) to the origin
position, checks allow movement a –200 to +200 pulse range.
36 Rev.F
6.6. T09 Pump
Description ・When moving the Pump to the Origin Sensor position, the following trouble
occurred.
・Sensor detection failed after the Pump moved the specified pulses.
・The number of pulses marking Pump movement did not fall within the –3 to
+3 range specified for the set number of pulses.
・When the Pump moved out of the Origin Sensor position, the Origin Sensor
did not turn off despite the Pump moving the specified number of pulses.
Cause ・The Pump hit something in the drive route, destabilizing the motor. Then, when
returning, the number of pulses wasn’t right.
・The Pump Origin Sensor is broken.
・Check if anything is obstructing the Reagent Table in front.
・Check whether the Shipping Retainer has been removed or not.
Serviceman ・Check the Pump Drive System.
Display
Ｔ０９Ｐｕｍｐ
Printout -----------------------------------
T09 Pump
Sts = 2, Act = 5
-----------------------------------
no longer continue, therefore Pump origin return is repeated.
37 Rev.F
6.7. T12 Optical gain
Description ・ Gain cannot be set automatically at power on or during Optical System

calibration.
measurement.
Cause ・STD-W reflectance measured in Optical System calibration is abnormal.
・White Plate reflectance measured in Optical System calibration is abnormal.
・There is not enough light to determine gain automatically.
・The gain setting circuit is damaged.
Serviceman ・Replace the LED.
Action ・Check the gain circuit.
・Check the Optical System.
Display
Ｔ１２Ｏｐｔｉｃａｌｇａｉｎ

Printout -----------------------------------
T12 Optical gain
ADC0.C ( 312) (Service mode only)
REF(405) (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Effected channels (CH1 - 9, REF when gain is set with the reference
light)
memory.
・ If trouble occurs in power-on checks, measurements cannot be started,
therefore the system must be rebooted.
38 Rev.F
6.8. T13 Calculation
Description ・A calculation error occurred (an attempt was made to divide by 0).
・In obtaining the below linearity, little difference existed between X1 and X2.
・Linearity of optical calibration curve at power on
・Linearity of coefficient over time in Magnetic Card calibration calculation
・Linearity of optical calibration curve in optical calibration.
Cause ・All A/D counts are 0.
・Or, the system is frothing.
User Action ・If the trouble reoccurs, contact the manufacturer.
Serviceman ・Check the Optical System.
Action ・Check the A/D circuit.
Display
Ｔ１３Ｃａｌｃｕｌａｔｉｏｎ
Printout -----------------------------------
T13 Calculation Effected channels
CLC0.C ( 1148) CH7 (Service mode only)
ML= 1.00000E+00, IL= 1.00000E+00 (Service mode only)
MH= 1.00000E+00, IH= 1.00000E+00 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Printed out only when trouble occurs in obtaining the linearity of
coefficient over time. (Calculation results for the linearity of
coefficient over time are printed out.)
39 Rev.F
6.9. T14 LED intensity
Description ・When power is turned on, direct light of all wavelengths is measured 20 times
at the lowest gain. The mean of that count didn’t exceed 1282. Or, the system
is frothing.
・During measurement, direct light is measured 5 times at the wavelength of the
measurement channel. The total of that count is not within 10000 - 20475.
・During measurement, reflected light is measured 5 times at the wavelength of
the measurement channel. The total of that count is more than 20475.
Cause ・The LED is not lit.
・The LED has aged.
・A Fiber is broken.
・The Sensor is broken. Trouble in the A/D converter.
Serviceman ・Replace the LED.
Action ・Check the A/D circuit.
・Check the Photometry Unit.
Display
Ｔ１４ＬＥＤｉｎｔｅｎｓｉｔｙ
ＬｏｗＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
When count is higher than the set range: High

When count is lower than the set range: Low
Printout -----------------------------------
T14 LED intensity Low
ADC0.C ( 238) (Service mode only)
405 m= 1096 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
When trouble occurs at power on:
(Effected wavelengths [405, 550, 575, 610, 820 nm]
m … Mean count )
When trouble occurs during measurement:
(CH … Effected channels [1 - 9]
Effected wavelengths [405, 550, 575, 610, 820 nm]
N … Count )
40 Rev.F
6.10. T17 Device error
Description ・Trouble was detected in the PMC or Sub CPU.

Cause ・The internal cable is disconnected.
・The PMC or Sub CPU crashed.
Serviceman ・Check whether the Cable is disconnected or not.
Action ・Check the Cable for open circuits.
・Replace the PWA.
Display
Ｔ１７Ｄｅｖｉｃｅｅｒｒｏｒ
（ＳＵＢ）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
When trouble is in the PMC: (PMC)

When trouble is in the sub CPU: (SUB)
Printout -----------------------------------
T17 Device error SUB
PMC0.C ( 176) (Service mode only)
Error = 0x01 (Service mode only)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
Error code
（0x01: Data was sent while waiting for a command.
0x02: A command was sent while waiting for data.
0x04: Pulse rate is outside the set range.
0x08: The number of acceleration pulses is outside the set range.
0x10: The number of operating pulses is outside the set range.
0x20: Drive time and Sensor are wrongly set.
0x40: An operating command was sent without the necessary settings.
0x80: an operating command was sent while the motor was running.)
41 Rev.F
6.11. T20 Tip picking
Description ・After Tip pickup (measurement), when the Tip Pickup Sensor checked to see
that the Tip was attached, it was found that it wasn’t.
Cause ・Tips were left.
・The Tip pickup position (Nozzle vertical or left-right positioning) is out-of-place,
so the Tip could not be attached.
・There was trouble in left-right Tip pickup detection. The Tip pickup sensor got
detection wrong.
・The Tip pickup sensor is broken.
User Action ・Load Tips.
・Restart measurement.
Serviceman ・Adjust Tip pickup position.
Action ・Check the Tip Pickup Sensor.
・Check the Nozzle Drive System.
・If the Sensor is broken, replace it.
Display
Ｔ２０Ｔｉｐｐｉｃｋｉｎｇ
Printout -----------------------------------
T20 Tip picking
-----------------------------------
42 Rev.F
6.12. T21 Tip ejecting
Description ・After discarding the Tip (measurement), when the Tip Pickup Sensor checked
to see that the Tip had been discarded, it detected the Tip still on the Nozzle.
・During hardware origin return at power on, the Tip could not be discarded.
Cause ・The Tip discard position is out-of-place.
・The Tip Pickup Sensor was out-of-place, so it got detection wrong.
・There was trouble in left-right Tip pickup detection. The Tip Pickup Sensor got
detection wrong.
・The Tip Pickup Sensor is broken.
User Action ・Turn power off and remove the Tip from the Nozzle.
Serviceman ・Adjust Tip discard position.
Action ・Check the Tip Pickup Sensor.
・Check the Nozzle Drive System.
・If the Sensor is broken, replace it.
Display
Ｔ２１Ｔｉｐｅｊｅｃｔｉｎｇ
Printout -----------------------------------
T21 Tip ejecting
-----------------------------------
Remarks ・Measurement results are output.
・If this trouble occurs at power on, pressure checks cannot be made, therefore
measurements cannot be started. (Attempting will generate T03.) In this case,
it is necessary to reboot the system.
43 Rev.F
6.13. T25 Barcode sensor
Description ・When setting gain for the Reagent Barcode Sensor, no matter what level gain
the A/D count from the White Plate is set to, it doesn’t fall within the tolerance
range (55 - 128).
・In gain setting, the A/D count for the Black Plate is too big for the A/D count
from the White Plate (White/Black) < 2.0.
・Reagent Barcode Sensor gain is set at power on.
measurement.
Cause ・Trouble in the Barcode Sensor.
・The White and Black Plates are dirty.
User Action ・Clean the White and Black Plates.
Serviceman ・Check the Barcode Sensor (Sub CPU A/D printout).
Action
Display
Ｔ２５Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅｓｅｎｓｏｒ
（８５３）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Effected channels[1 - 5, 7 - 9]
At the start of measurement, “Not Ready” is printed out.
Printout -----------------------------------
T25 Barcode sensor ( 8 5 3 )
-----------------------------------
Same as display
memory.
・ If trouble occurs in power-on checks, measurements cannot be started,
therefore the system must be rebooted.
44 Rev.F
6.14. T27 Centrifuge
Description ・Centrifuge speed is not within the tolerance range (7000 - 16000 rpm).
・The Centrifuge does not spin.
・A check is made at power on and during measurement (when Centrifuge is
used).
Cause ・Trouble in the Centrifuge Rotation Motor
・The Rotation Detection Sensor is broken.
・Because of trouble in the Centrifuge Base (forward-back movement), the
Centrifuge Rotation Interlock (Limit Switch) didn’t come on.
・The Centrifuge Rotation Interlock (Limit Switch) is broken.
・Something is caught in Centrifuge and keeping it from spinning.
・Sample is not set or the sample amount is too small.
・The Protect Cover is not attached.
Serviceman ・Check the Centrifuge Rotation Motor.
Action ・Check Centrifuge speed.
・Check whether the Motor and Sensor are disconnected or not.
・Check whether the Rotation Detection Sensor and Centrifuge Rotation
Interlock (Limit Switch) are broken or not
Display
Ｔ２７Ｃｅｎｔｒｉｆｕｇｅ
（Ｃｏｖｅｒ）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
(Cover)････Protect Cover is not on (When rotation is 0rpm)

(Position)･･Initialization of rotation（positioning）is not available
Blank･････Rotation is abnormal
Printout -----------------------------------
T27 Centrifuge
Centrifuge speed = 3500rpm (Service mode only)
Sts = 2, Act = 5
-----------------------------------
Centrifuge speed when trouble was detected.
Remarks ・Measurement can be started even if trouble was detected in power-on checks.
・Rotation detection is not performed for the first 8 sec after rotation starts.
45 Rev.F
6.15. T28 Centrifuge F/B
Description ・When moving the Centrifuge Base to the origin or sample setting position, the
following trouble occurred.
・Sensor detection failed within the specified time.
・When the Centrifuge Base moved out of the origin position, the Origin Sensor
did not turn off despite the Centrifuge Base moving the specified time.
Cause ・The Motor and Sensor are disconnected.
・The Sensor is broken.
・The Centrifuge Rotation Interlock (Limit Switch) is broken.
・There is something in the Centrifuge Base’s drive route that is keeping it from
moving.
・The Tip, Centrifuge Container or something else is sticking up and keeping the
Base from moving.
・Check for obstructions.
・Correctly set the Tip and Centrifuge Tube.
Serviceman ・Check the Centrifuge Case forward-back movement.
・Check whether the Centrifuge Forward-Back Sensor and Centrifuge Rotation
Interlock (Limit Switch) are broken or not.
・If the trouble occurred while the Centrifuge was moving to the rear (origin),
move the Centrifuge forward.
Display
Ｔ２８ＣｅｎｔｒｉｆｕｇｅＦ／Ｂ
Printout -----------------------------------
T28 Centrifuge F/B
Sts = 2, Act = 5
-----------------------------------
1: Sensor disconnection was impossible. )
no longer continue, therefore Centrifuge Base origin return is repeated.
・When the Sensor is doused, detection is off (not detected).
46 Rev.F
6.16. T90 Memory:product
Description ・ There is trouble in the memory that stores product information. Product
information cannot be written or erased. Check sum error in read data.
・All product information is initialized or returned to previous settings.
performed, such as to write or erase product information.
Cause ・There is trouble in the memory that stores product information.
User Action ・Contact the manufacturer.
Serviceman ・Enter corrupt data again.
Action ・Check and replace the memory board.
・Initialize or return all product information to previous settings.
Display
Ｔ９０Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ：ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔ
Printout -----------------------------------
T90 Memory:product
-----------------------------------
47 Rev.F
6.17. T91 Memory:mechanism
Description ・There is trouble in the memory that stores hardware information. Hardware
information cannot be written or erased. Check sum error in read data.
・All hardware information is initialized or returned to previous settings.
performed, such as to write or erase hardware information.
Cause ・There is trouble in the memory that stores hardware information.
Action ・Readjust hardware.
・Check and replace the memory board.
・Initialize or return all hardware information to previous settings.
Display
Ｔ９１Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ：ｍｅｃｈａｎｉｓｍ
Printout -----------------------------------
T91 Memory:mechanism
-----------------------------------
48 Rev.F
6.18. T92 Memory:optical
Description ・There is trouble in the memory that stores Optical System information. Optical
System information cannot be written or erased. Check sum error in read data.
・All Optical System information is initialized or returned to previous settings.
performed, such as to write or erase Optical System information.
Cause ・There is trouble in the memory that stores Optical System information.
Action ・Recalibrate the Optical System.
・Check and replace the memory board.
・Initialize or return all Optical System information to previous settings.
Display
Ｔ９２Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ：ｏｐｔｉｃａｌ
Printout -----------------------------------
T92 Memory:optical
-----------------------------------
49 Rev.F
6.19. T93 Memory:parameter
Description ・There is trouble in the memory that stores measurement (magnetic card)
information. Measurement information cannot be written or erased. Check sum
error in read data.
・Abnormal information is deleted.
・All measurement information is initialized or returned to previous settings.
performed, such as to write or erase measurement information.
Cause ・There is trouble in the memory that stores measurement information.
Serviceman ・Enter corrupt data of the Magnetic Card again.
Action ・Check and replace the memory board.
・Delete abnormal measurement information.
Display
Ｔ９３Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ：ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ
（Ｓ－０３）ＯＫ（ＥＮＴＥＲ）
Item No. of abnormal parameter (Multi ... M-XX, Single ... S-XX)
Printout -----------------------------------
T93 Memory:parameter (S-03)
-----------------------------------
Same as display
50 Rev.F
7. Drive unit trouble overview

For the following 6 types of device trouble (T05 nozzle U/D, T06 Nozzle L/R, T07 Reagent Table, T09
Pump, T27 Centrifuge, T28 Centrifuge F/B) the information below outlines during what action which
trouble type occurs. Please refer to the information below for interpretation of these trouble types.
Status Action (Act)

Initial status 0 Initial status 0
Initial status 0
Device initialization 1
During Startup
1 Pressure testing 2
processing
Optical block testing 3
Barcode gain setting 4
Initial status 0
Cover closing – mechanical 1
initialization
Barcode reading 2
Optical block testing 3
Centrifugation 4
Tip attachment 5
During measurement 2 Liquid level detection 6
Sample aspiration 7
Dropping 8
Photometry 9
Expulsion of remaining sample 10
Tip ejection 11
Mechanical initialization – cover 12
opening
Initial status 0
Other action 3
Processing 1
51 Rev.F

SP 4430 ServiceManual SP3 C37B 029 Rev.F

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP 4430 ServiceManual SP3 C37B 029 Rev.F

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP 4430 ServiceManual SP3 C37B 029 Rev.F

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ＳＰＯＴＣＨＥＭＴＭ

Date of issue March.2001

Drawing No. SP-3-C37B-029

1. Outline of the Analyzer

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

LCD COMPUTING NOZZLE UNIT

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

(2) Upper Body Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

(3) Magnetic Card Reader Unit

●Before S/N.41505021 and before S/N.51505001

●From S/N.41505021 onwards and from S/N.51505001 onwards

(4) Under Body Assembly

[Front Inner Panel Assembly]

[Under Cover] Installation Screw

[Front Inner Panel Assembly]

(5) Chassis Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

(6) Board Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

(7) Centrifuge Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

(8) Measurement Part Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

(9) Table Transfer Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

(10) Photometry System Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

For Thermistor sensor

(11) Light Source Unit Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

16 1 LED Wiring (for M 2) 102713 1

(12) Nozzle Drive Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

●About Nozzle L/R Drive Unit parts

(13) Nozzle Up-Down Drive Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

(14) Nozzle Left-Right Drive Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

(15) Sampling Pump Assembly

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

Chapter 3 Service Mode（Version 2.00 or later）

4.5. Printer Test ................................................................................................................................................38

1. Menu of the service mode

1.1. Menu of the service mode (1/2 page)

1.Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ Getting the Measurement Standby Screen

7.Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ Getting the Control Measurement

2.Ｓｕｂｍｅｎｕ 1.Ｒｅｓｕｌｔｓ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ 1.Ｌａｔｅｓｔ Reprinting Measurement Results(Latest)

2.ＰＡＲＡＭ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing User Parameters

3.Ｍａｉｎｔｅｎａｎｃｅ Maintenance Menu

5.Ｃｌｏｃｋ Setting the Clock

7.Ｕｎｉｔ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Service Parameters

8.Ｒａｎｇｅ 1.Ｐｒｉｎｔ Printing Service Parameters

3.Ｃａｌｉｂｒａｔｅ 1.ＣＡＲＤ Magnetic Card Calibration

※ : User Mode. The instructions are not on this service manual.

1.2(1). Menu of the service mode (2/2 page)

5.Ｐｒｉｎｔｅｒ Printer Test

9.Ｆａｃｔｏｒｙ 1.Ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔ Entering Product Information

5.Ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ 1.Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ Checking Optical System Calibration

5.Ｐｒｉｎｔｅｒ Printer Test

Ｎｅｗｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ．Ｖｘ．ｘｘ

７．Ｕｎｉｔ８．ＳＵＢＡ／Ｄ＋

Ｓｅｌｅｃｔｐｕｔｃｈａｎｎｅｌ.＋

ＥｊｅｃｔＵ／Ｄ＜２６５＞＋

ＰｒｅｓｓｕｒｅＵ／Ｄ＜３２０＞＋

ＴａｂｌｅＤｒｏｐ＜６９３＞＋

Ｄｒｏｐ（ＣＨ９）Ｕ／Ｄ＜１０５＞＋

ＣｕｖｅｔｔｅＵ／Ｄ＜３５６＞＋

ＣＮＴＲＦＧｔｉｍｅ＜１８０＞＋